TEC Electronic Cash Register
S/A Operators Guide
S/A Manager's Guide
M/S Level Operator's Guide
M/S Level Manager's Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. STAND-ALONE LEVEL
OPERATOR’S GUIDE
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOC 2
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................1-1
1.1
1.2
Applicable Model .............................................................................................................1-1
Accessories .....................................................................................................................1-1
2. SPECIFICATION ..............................................................................................2-1
2.1
2.2
ECR .................................................................................................................................2-1
Hardware Option..............................................................................................................2-2
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE.........................................................3-1
3.1
3.2
Front View........................................................................................................................3-1
Rear View ........................................................................................................................3-2
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS ................................................4-1
4.1
4.2
Mode Lock .......................................................................................................................4-1
Mode Selector Keys.........................................................................................................4-1
5. DISPLAY...........................................................................................................5-1
5.1
5.2
Operator Display ..............................................................................................................5-1
Customer Display ............................................................................................................5-3
6. KEYBOARD......................................................................................................6-1
6.1
6.2
Keyboard Layout..............................................................................................................6-1
Functions of Each Key .....................................................................................................6-2
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION .............................................................7-1
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS .................................8-1
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Code Entry Method ..........................................................................................................8-1
Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys) ..................................................................................8-2
Training Mode Start and End ...........................................................................................8-3
“Cashier Exclusive” Option ..............................................................................................8-4
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES ...............................................................................9-1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection ..................................................................................9-2
Store Message Display ....................................................................................................9-2
No-sale ............................................................................................................................9-2
Loan .................................................................................................................................9-3
Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)..................................................9-4
No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency ...................................9-4
No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency ...................................9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
TOC 3
TOC 1
9.8
9.9
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard.................................................................9-5
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window .........................................................9-6
9.10 Repeat Entry ....................................................................................................................9-7
9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication) ..................................................................................9-7
9.12 Set Menu Entry ................................................................................................................9-8
9.13 Modifier Entry...................................................................................................................9-9
9.14 Other Income PLU Entry..................................................................................................9-9
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry.....................................................................................................9-10
9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry .....................................................................................................9-10
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry ..................................................................................9-11
9.18 Scale Entry ....................................................................................................................9-11
9.19 Subtotal Read ................................................................................................................9-12
9.20 Tray Total Read .............................................................................................................9-13
9.21 Item Correct ...................................................................................................................9-14
9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise) .........................................9-14
9.23 All Void...........................................................................................................................9-15
9.24 Order Entry Control........................................................................................................9-15
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.................................................................................9-17
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion ...........................................9-18
9.27 Guest Check Merge .......................................................................................................9-18
9.28 Guest Check Transfer....................................................................................................9-18
9.29 Guest Check Split ..........................................................................................................9-19
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale) ...................................................9-20
9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track ....................................................................................9-20
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies ....................................................................................9-21
9.33 Media Transfer...............................................................................................................9-21
9.34 Tax Status Modification .................................................................................................9-22
9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation .............................................................................................9-22
9.36 Manual Tax Entry...........................................................................................................9-22
9.37 Tax Exemption ...............................................................................................................9-23
9.38 Listing Capacity Open....................................................................................................9-23
9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification ....................................................................9-23
9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read .................................................................................9-23
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read..................................................................................................9-24
9.42 PLU Stock Read ............................................................................................................9-24
9.43 Dollar Discount ..............................................................................................................9-25
9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge ................................................................................9-25
9.45 Non-add Number Print ...................................................................................................9-26
9.46 Number-of-guests Entry.................................................................................................9-26
9.47 Function Key Entry ........................................................................................................9-26
9.48 Tip Paid..........................................................................................................................9-27
9.49 Charge Tip .....................................................................................................................9-27
9.50 Received-on-Account ....................................................................................................9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOC 2
9.51 Paid-Out.........................................................................................................................9-28
9.52 Print Mode Invert ...........................................................................................................9-28
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut .....................................................................9-29
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print .................................................................9-30
9.55 Guest Check Print..........................................................................................................9-30
9.56 Check Print ....................................................................................................................9-31
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint) .......................................9-32
9.58 Server Transfer ..............................................................................................................9-33
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out.........................................................................................9-34
10. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................10-1
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply ........................................................................10-1
10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard...............................................................................10-1
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer ..................................................................................10-2
10.4 Problems concerning the Display ..................................................................................10-2
10.5 Problems during Normal Operations .............................................................................10-2
CAUTION:
1. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of
TOSHIBA TEC.
2. The contents of this manual may be changed without notification.
3. Please refer to your local Authorized Service representative with regard to any queries
you may have in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS
1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the TEC electronic cash register FS-2600-1 series. This owner’s manual provides a de-
scription of the functions and handling of this register and should be read carefully to ensure optimum per-
formance. Since every consideration has been given to safety and reliability, there is no danger of damaging the
machine by incorrect operation.
Please refer to this manual whenever you have any questions concerning the machine. This machine has been
manufactured under strict quality control and should give you full satisfaction.
•
Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.
1.1
Applicable Model
•
•
FS-2600-1MD-US
FS-2600-1MD-C-US
The description of the model number is as follows.
F S - 2 6 0 0 - 1 M D - C - U S
Destination (Nation Code)
(US, etc.)
MCR (Magnetic Card Reader)
Blank: Not provided
C: Provided
BIU (Back Indicator Unit for Customer)
Blank: Not provided
D: Provided (1 line)
M/S Board for Master-Satellite System
Blank: Not provided
M: Provided
1.2
Accessories
Owner’s Manual
Control Key
Double Sems Screw
(EO1-11138; 1 pc.)
(REG Key, MGR Key, MA Key,
S Key; 2 pcs. respectively)
(M-3x8; 1pc.)
* Used to secure the Cable Blind Plate
Refer to 3.2 Rear View (page 3-2).
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2.1 ECR
2. SPECIFICATION
2. SPECIFICATION
2.1
ECR
2.1.1
Software Item
Capacity of Department Memory
Capacity of Group Memory
Max. 99 departments
Max. 30 groups
Capacity of Major Group Memory
Capacity of Cashier Memory
Max. 10 major groups
Max. 8 cashiers for the [CLK] key
Using Standard Memory
Max. 15 cashiers
Using Expansion Memory
Max. 99 cashiers
Max. 200 employees
Max. 5000 tables
Capacity of Employee Memory
Capacity of Customer File Table
Capacity of PLU Memory
Max. 200 employees
Max. 5000 tables
Without the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”
Max. 1000 PLUs Max. 2500 PLUs
With the option “Collecting the PLU data by each price level”
Max. 500 PLUs Max. 1500 PLUs
Max. 99 PLU groups
Max. 6 digits; 0.00 to 9999.99
Capacity of PLU Group Memory
Unit Price Programmable
2.2.1
Hardware Item
Size
280 mm (width) x 442 mm (depth) x 235.6 mm (height)
(or 475.5 mm (depth) and 129.5 mm (height) when the operator display
is in its full opened position.)
Weight
4.0 kg
Power Required
Power Consumed
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Interface Port
117 V, 60 Hz (US)/240V, 50 Hz (AU)
0.3 A (operating; US)/0.14 A (operating; AU)
0 C to 40 C
10% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
COM 1 & 2, PC and M/S
Memory Protection
Long-lasting rechargeable lithium battery is provided.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. SPECIFICATION
2.2 Hardware Option
2.2
Hardware Option
Option Name
IF-2600RS
Description
Source
The 3rd printer can be connected to the FS-2600 by
installing this interface board.
Contact your TOSHIBA
TEC representative.
KRAM-H-2600
KRAM-1-2600
KRAM-2-2600
KRAM-4-2600
KBD-2600-2
Expansion memory of 0.5 MB
Expansion memory of 1 MB
Expansion memory of 2 MB
Expansion memory of 4 MB
2- line back indicator unit
(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)
KRD-2600-1
KRD-2600-2
1-line remote indicator unit (7-digit 7- segment display)
2- line remote indicator unit
(16-digit dot display and 7-digit 7-segment display)
IF-1650C
MD-6
Interface board to connect a scale to the FS-2600
A maximum of 2 remote drawers can be connected to the
FS-2600 to realize the multi-drawer feature. Either the “multi-
drawer feature controlled by a cashier” or “multi-drawer
feature controlled by a currency” can be selected.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE
3.1 Front View
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE
3.1
Front View
Operator Display
Navigation Key
Keyboard
MCR (Magnetic
Card Reader)
AC Cord
Power Switch
■ Power Switch ............ Insure that the power switch is in the OFF position before connecting AC power.
you can adjust the display
to the best viewing angle.
Brightness Control
CAUTION!
1. Do not try to force the display beyond its full opened position.
2. Do not press on or put any pressure on the MCR unit as it may be easily broken.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE
3.2 Rear View
3.2
Rear View
Customer Display
Interface for Master-
Satellite System
Cable Blind Plate
COM 1 Port
Secure the Cable Blind Plate with the attached
Double Sems Screw.
Refer to 1.2 Accessories (page 1-1).
■ A maximum of 2 drawers can be connected.
■ A scale can be connected by installing the
IF-1650C (Hardware Option)
COM 2 Port
PC Interface
IF-2600 RS
(COM 3 & COM 4;
Hardware Option)
■ The following printers can be connected to each port (COM 1 to COM 3; COM 4 is for future use).
•
•
•
BRST-10 (Used for Receipt)
TM-300 (Used for Receipt, Journal, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)
TM-T88 (Used for Receipt, RKP; Remote Kitchen Printer)
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS
4.1 Mode Lock
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS
4.1
Mode Lock
(POSITION)
(FUNCTION)
MGR
X
REG
SET ........... In this position, the register will allow
programming operations.
Z
........... (LOCK position) The register operations are
locked when the Mode Lock is in this position.
Meanwhile, the Display Message and the
current time are displayed.
SET
REG
Key
REG ........... Normal cash register operations are carried
out in this mode. However, the operations
requiring a Manager Intervention cannot be
performed in this mode.
MGR
Key
X.............. The sale totals in memory can be read and
the programmed data can be verified in this
position.
MGR........... This position allows to register all normal cash
register operations to be carried out in the
“REG” mode and the operations requiring a
Manager Intervention.
MA
Key
- .............. This is the “Negative Mode”, which
automatically processes all the entries in the
reverse way, i.e. positive items into negative,
and the negative into positive. It is usually
used to return or cancel all the items once
purchased in a sale in the “REG” or “MGR”
mode.
Z .............. All the resettable totals and their respective
counters in memory will be read and reset in
this position.
4.2
Mode Selector Keys
REG Key: The REG Key is used by the cashier or clerk who operates the register.
MGR Key: The MGR Key is used by the store manager or a person authorized by the
manager.
MA Key:
The MA Key is used by the store manager who will daily supervise the
collection of money and the printout of transactions recorded by the register.
This key is also used when programming the register.
The keys may be inserted or pulled out at the “LOCK” or “REG” position.
In the OPERATOR’S GUIDE, functions and operations will be described within the range of the Mode Lock
positions of LOCK and REG using the REG key. Since operations requiring other positions and keys are
controlled by the store manager, they are described in the MANAGER’S GUIDE.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. DISPLAY
5.1 Operator Display
5. DISPLAY
The FS-2600 is provided with the LCD operator display and the 7-segment customer display.
5.1
Operator Display
5.1.1
Basic Screen (common to all the mode lock positions)
2
3
4
5
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
1
2
1
02-06-1999 03:04 Z9 1CLKendi
1
2
6
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
9
C
8
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
0
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
■ Description of each Display Item
Display Item
Display Line
1
Description
Displays the current mode lock position. (7 digits)
1 Mode Lock Position
SET:
:
SET
*
*
REG:
X:
MGR:
- :
Z:
BLIND:
REG
X/GTX
REG
REG-
Z/GTZ
SET
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2 Date
1
1
1
1
2
Displays the date. (10 digits)
3 Time
Displays the time. (5 digits)
4 Cashier Code
5 Cashier Name
Displays the cashier code. (2 digits)
Displays the cashier name. (12 characters)
6 Terminal Status
Displays the indicator which shows the terminal status. For
details, refer to the next section “Description of each Indicator”.
Indicator
7 Display Area for each
2 ~ 14
15
Refer to the display configuration for each mode position.
Mode Position
8 Navigation Key
For details, refer to “Description of each Navigation Key” attached
to the display configuration for each mode position.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. DISPLAY
5.1 Operator Display
■ Description of each Display Item (continued)
Display Item
Display Line
15
Description
9 Printer Error Indicator
Displays the error indicator “X” to indicate that an error status has
occurred on the printer which is connected to the terminal. From
the left; Port 1, Port 2 and Port 3. The rightmost one will be used
for the future.
0 Print Data Reception
15
11
Displays the indicator “★” while the print data is being received
from another terminal.
Indicator
A Sales Item Name
Displays a sales item which has been just entered with a double-
width sized character. (16 double-width sized characters) Also,
displays an operation guidance message. (Max. 36 characters)
Guidance Message
B Quantity
12
12
Displays a quantity with a double-width sized numeral.
(max. 3-digit integral portion and 2-digit decimal portion)
C Numeric
Displays a numeric value entered and a sales total with a double-
width sized numeral.
Sales Total
5.1.2
Description of each Indicator
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
1
2
1
2
1| || |||||||78
2
3
4
5
6
■ Description of each Display Item
Display Item
Description
1 For Future Use
For Future Use (1 digit)
2 Receipt ON/OFF Indicator
3 RTR (Register-to-Register) Indicator
4 Price Level Indicator
Displays OFF while the receipt-issue mode is in “OFF”. (3 digits)
Displays RTR while the RTR declaration is in ON. (3 digits)
Displays the PLU price level currently selected. (2 digits)
•
•
•
•
•
PRICE 1 (1st PRICE):
PRICE 2 (2nd PRICE):
PRICE 3 (3rd PRICE):
PRICE 4 (4th PRICE):
PRICE 5 (5th PRICE):
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
5 Menu Shift Level Indicator
Displays the PLU menu shift level currently selected. (2 digits)
•
•
•
•
•
MENU SHIFT 1:
MENU SHIFT 2:
MENU SHIFT 3:
MENU SHIFT 4:
MENU SHIFT 5:
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
6 Caps Lock and Double-width
Displays the following during the programming operation
including the character entries. (2 digits)
Designation
Small Letter/Normal Size:
a
Capital Letter/Normal Size:
Small Letter/Double-width Size:
Capital Letter/Double-width Size:
A
a
A
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. DISPLAY
5.2 Customer Display
■ Description of each Display Item (continued)
Display Item
Description
7 Previous Screen
Displays the indicator “↑” when the menu has previous screens.
(1 digit)
8 Continuation Screen
Displays the indicator “↓” when the menu has continuation
screens. (1 digit)
5.2
Customer Display
Upper Row
(16-digit dot
display;
Hardware
Option)
AMOUNT
TL
Lower Row
7-digit 7-
segment
ST
CG
display
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. KEYBOARD
6.1 Keyboard Layout
6. KEYBOARD
The following is the standard keyboard layout, which was initially set at the factory. This register is designed to be
capable of programming most of the keys at the desired locations or adding keys. For details of the keyboard
layout change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.
6.1
Keyboard Layout
VOID RECEIPT R/A
ISSUE
PO
BREAK BREAK
IN OUT
TX1/M TX2/M TAKE EAT
IN
OUT
OUT
TIP
IN
POSITION
#
SERVER CHG
TRANS. TIP
PAID
CHECK CHECK SPLIT PRINT
MERGE TRANS. CHECK CHECK
ESC
ENTER NEXT
PAGE
UP
ALL
ITEM OPEN PAGE
VOID CORR
#
DOWN
NS
C
START
CHECK
X
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6
3
SERVER
#
2
PLU
00
RECALL
TOTAL
ST
AT/TL
PLU Preset-code Keys
Other Optional Key:
[000] (Triple-zero Key)
[CHECK]
[Chg]
[AMT]
[SCALE]
[TARE]
[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]
[PUB MODE]
[END]
[MISC]
[CPN]
[CREDIT 1] to [CREDIT 5]
[%+] (%1)
[SERVER #/RECEIPT]
[CUR 1] to [CUR 5]
[TRAY TL]
[RECEIPT PRINT]
[PICKUP BAL]
[CODE OPEN]
[DISPLAY]
[RECEIPT]
[%-] (%2)
[DISC]
[CLK 1] to [CLK 8]
[CARD NO.]
[CODE SHIFT 1] to
[CODE SHIFT 5]
[PR OPEN]
[LC OPEN]
[TAX]
[READ]
[RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10]
[INVERT]
[RKP]
[TENDER UP]
[COMBO]
[TX3/M], [TX4/M]
[EX]
[MANUAL TARE]
[RKP Msg #]
[SELECT]
[HOME]
[SI1/M], [SI1/TL]
[SI2/M], [SI2/TL]
[RPT]
[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]
[GUEST #]
[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]
[RECEIPT CUT]
[LCD OFF]
Additional [%-] Keys (%3 to %8)
[RTR] (for Master-Satellite System)
[STOCK]
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. KEYBOARD
6.2 Functions of Each Key
6.2
Functions of Each Key
P
t
.
y
n
.
k
o
y
.
o
.
s
y
(SvcImiz)rtoTakeyl.
S
.
t
t
y
.
e
t
e
.
n
.
t
i
e
PcntChargkey.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. KEYBOARD
6.2 Functions of Each Key
N
t
h
.
d
e
t
a
S
e
a
.
I
.
.
S
T
.
n
y
ChargTipKey.
(
k
.
e
.
.
.
2
v
t
.
.
.
t
.
e
M
rTotalKey.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. KEYBOARD
6.2 Functions of Each Key
T
.
K
.
y
y
.
e
T
w
y
y
A
y
E
e
P
e
SlctKey
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION
7. PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION
1. Unpack the accessories and the cash register from the carton.
2. Place the cash register at a proper location, referring to the Safety Precautions at the beginning of the
Operator’s Guide.
3. Remove the tapes and seals for holding parts or protecting the cash registers surfaces.
4. Plug the power cord plug into a wall outlet.
5. Insert the REG key into the Control Lock, then turn it to the REG position.
6. Before starting actual transaction entries on the cash register, ask your manager if you need additional setting
or the initial programmed data needs to be changed. For programming, refer to the following chapters in the
Manager’s Guide:
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION (page 5-1)
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA (page 6-1)
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS
8.1 Code Entry Method
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS
The FS-2600 adopts one of the following cashier-identifying operations.
•
•
CODE ENTRY METHOD, using the [SERVER #] key.
CASHIER KEY METHOD, using [CLK] keys.
8.1
Code Entry Method
Each cashier will sign-ON, sign-OFF, sign-IN, and sign-OUT through the [SERVER #] key.
OPERATION: Mode Lock: REG (or, MGR or - with Manager Intervention)
When you turn the Mode Lock to the REG (or MGR, - ), the following screen will appear on the LCD.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
P1S1
Please input cashier code
TOTAL
0.00
0.00
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5
8.1.1
Single-drawer Machines
Sign-ON
[SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are
displayed and the sales transaction
is allowed.
2-digit manager-assign code
(01 to 99)
2-digit cashier’s own secret code
(01 to 99)
Sign-OUT
Sign-IN
9 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OUT” is displayed.
[SERVER #] ................ Cashier code and name are
(same as Sign-ON)
displayed and the sales transaction
is allowed.
Sign-OFF
0 [SERVER #] ............. Message “SIGN OFF” is displayed
and no sales transaction is allowed.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS
8.2 Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)
Sign-ON..........to be operated to start the job.
Sign-OUT........to be operated to leave the register for a while expecting to come back soon.
Sign-IN............to be operated when the cashier comes back from a break declared by Sign-OUT.
Sign-OFF ........to be operated to end the job.
8.1.2
Multi-drawer Machines
Operations are basically the same as those for Single-drawer Machines, except that a one-digit drawer No. is
entered through the [X] key prior to the Sign-ON entry:
Sign-ON
[X]
[SERVER #]
2-digit manager-assign code
2-digit cashier’s own secret code
1 or 2 as Drawer No.
Entry of a drawer No. opens the designated drawer on finalizing the sale transaction. Designation of the drawer
No. which is being used by another cashier causes an error.
Sign-OUT
Sign-IN
Same as those for Single-drawer Machines.
Sign-OFF
NOTE: When the drawer No. entry and the [X] key depression are skipped in the sign-ON, the drawer 1 will be
automatically assigned to the cashier, if the drawer 1 is not being used by another cashier.
8.2
Cashier Key Method ([CLK] Keys)
When the [SERVER #] key is not installed, [CLK] keys ([CLK 1] to [CLK 8]; max. 8 keys) may be provided on
the ECR keyboard.
Sale entries will be possible only when one of the [CLK] keys is depressed (in “REG”, “MGR”, or “ - ” mode).
When the same [CLK] key is again depressed, the cashier is in Cashier OFF status.
NOTE: When a cashier key is set ON, the cashier name will be displayed in the LCD.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS
8.3 Training Mode Start and End
8.3
Training Mode Start and End
This section describes the training function provided for newly employed cashiers. After entering the training
mode, a cashier may operate the same transaction entries as those in the REG mode. The data in the Training
Mode is processed into the training cashier memory, therefore it will not affect any actual sales data in business.
CONDITION
Outside a sale, and in Cashier Signed-OFF condition for CASHIER CODE ENTRY Method
8.3.1
Operation for Training Modes Start
■ Code Entry Method
[SERVER #] ............................................ The screen shown below appears on the LCD.
2-digit manager-assign code of a cashier with Training status (01 to 99)
2-digit cashier’s secret code (01 to 99)
■ Cashier Key Method
Set the Cashier Key programmed with Training status.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
TRAINING
*
SIGN ON
*
*
*
2CLBROWN
0.00
TOTAL
0.00
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5
8.3.2
Entries in Training Mode
A trainee can operate all the transaction entries described in the next chapter.
except: 1) The drawer will not open.
2) The Consecutive No. on the receipt will not be incremented.
3) Training symbol is printed on the receipt and the guest check.
4) Sales items entered in the Training Mode will not be printed on the journal.
5) If the remote kitchen printer is connected, the sales items entered in the Training Mode will be
printed on it with the training symbol.
8.3.3
Operation for Training Mode End
■ Code Entry Method
[SERVER #]
0
■ Cashier Key Method
Change the current Cashier Key to another.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
8. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS
8.4 “Cashier Exclusive” Option
8.4
“Cashier Exclusive” Option
When the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” is selected:
Every Cashier can access the other cashiers’guest order table accounts as well as his/her own.
When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected:
Cashiers with the status “Own Tables only”
The Cashier can only access the guest order tables from which he/she first takes orders or has reserved. An
error results on attempting to access the other cashiers’ tables.
Cashiers with the status “All Tables”
The Cashier can access any order table besides those he/she reserves or takes orders from. In this case, the
same is applied to the cashier as described for the program option “Cashier Not exclusive” selection above.
NOTE: When the program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected, even a cashier with the status “All Tables”
cannot handle the order table which a cashier with Training status has opened.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
WARNING!
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.
■ Condition Necessary to Start Transaction Entries
Mode Lock:
Insert the “REG” key and set it to the “REG” position.
Cashier Sign-ON:
If the [SERVER #] key is used for identifying a cashier, you must sign-ON or sign-IN.
(See Section 8.1)
If Cashier Keys are installed, you must set your cashier key to the ON status.
(See Section 8.2)
■ Description of each Navigation Key (REG, MGR, - )
13
14
15
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
1) Except the case 2) below
Display Item
Description
DISP1
1 Navigation Key 1
2 Navigation Key 2
3 Navigation Key 3
4 Navigation Key 4
5 Navigation Key 5
DISP2
DISP3
DISP4
DISP5
2) While the menu window is displayed
Display Item
Description
1 Navigation Key 1
↓
2 Navigation Key 2
3 Navigation Key 3
4 Navigation Key 4
5 Navigation Key 5
↑
Select
Enter
Pg dw
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.1 Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection
9.1
Receipt-Issue/Non-issue Selection
This operation determines whether or not the receipt is issued.
Mode Lock may be in any position: Pressing the [SERVER #/RECEIPT] key without a prior numeric entry or
pressing the [RECEIPT] key (whichever key is installed on the keyboard) will
change the receipt ON/OFF status. Each time the key is pressed the receipt
ON/OFF status is changed.
NOTES:
1. The “R OFF” status at the starting of a
transaction entry decides whether a
receipt will be issued for the transaction
or not. Switching the Receipt ON/OFF
status during a transaction will not be
effective.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
OFF
P1S1
Receipt OFF
Indicator
2. If a transaction entered with the “R OFF”
status and finalized but a receipt is
required, the [RECEIPT ISSUE] (Post-
issue Receipt) key can be operated to
issue a receipt.
RECEIPT OFF
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
DISP1
DISP2
DISP3
DISP4
DISP5
9.2
Store Message Display
This operation designates and displays one of the 4 messages programmed to be displayed in the REG or MGR
mode when the register is outside a sale. The message is displayed on the operator display and the dot display
area in the customer display.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
|Display Message Code| [NS]
1 to 4
(corresponding to Line No.
1 to 4 in programming)
NOTE: This operation is effective when the program options “Display Message Method 16 CHARACTERS
HELD” and “Display Message DISPLAY in REG and MGR mode (as well as in LOCK mode)” are both
selected.
9.3
No-sale
The no-sale transaction is used to open the cash drawer without affecting any sales, such as for giving change,
testing the receipt/journal print condition, etc.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
[NS]...................... The drawer opens and a No-sale receipt is issued.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9.4 Loan
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
-- Receipt Print Format --
Max. 4 lines of Store
Name/Message
(REMARK 2 below)
RESTAURANT
1343 PEACH DRIVE
PHONE : 87-6437
TEC
Open 10:00am to 9:00pm
Closed: every Wednesday
Max. 3 lines of Commercial Message
Date (Month-Day-Year order in
this sample)
Register No.
02-06-1999 SAT
#3001
Day-of-Week
No-sale Receipt Header
Consecutive No.
Current Time
Max. 2 lines of Footer
Logo Message (REMARK 1 below)
NO SALE
***
**
***
**
Name of the cashier who is
operating the register.
JONES
0085 15:59TM
Thank you
Call again
NOTES:
1. A no-sale transaction after a non-add
number print can be prohibited by the
program option.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
NO SALE
*
*
2. A no-sale transaction after an Order
Table No. entry is not possible.
REMARKS:
1. When the program option “Footer
Logo Message Print” is selected, a
maximum of 2-line Footer Logo
Message will be additionally printed
on the receipt issued for the sales
transaction without the Order Table
No. entry.
NO SALE
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
2. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the
TM-T88, you can make and print
your own logo on the Store Name/
Message area.
9.4
Loan
This operation is used to record the cash amounts loaned from the store as the change reserve in the drawer.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
[R/A]
|Cash Amount Loaned| [AT/TL]
([ST])
[AT/TL]
To read the loan
total so far entered.
Repeatable to add up amounts.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.5 Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)
NOTE: A loan transaction after an Order Table No.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
entry is not possible.
START BANK
*
*
CASH
CASH
CASH
TOTAL
20.00
30.00
50.00
100.00
TOTAL
100.00
100.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.5
Check Cashing (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
|Check Amount to be Cashed| [CHECK]
[NS] ........... The drawer opens to enable the exchange.
Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999
NOTES:
1. Other non-cash media keys may be used for this purpose if programmed to allow no-purchase
cashing.
2. A check cashing transaction after an Order Table No. entry is not possible.
9.6
No-sale Exchange from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
[CUR1]
|Amount of Foreign Currency 1 to be exchanged| [NS]
Max. 8 digits 1 to 99999999
NOTES:
1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
20.00
the same way.
CUR1
2. The fraction process method is fixed to
Round OFF.
0.365
CHANGE
*
7.30
CHANGE
7.30
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.7 No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency
9.7
No-sale Exchange from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency
OPERATION
|Amount of Domestic Currency to be exchanged| [CUR 1]
NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate in the same way.
(must be operated outside a sale)
[NS]
2. A program option allows you to prohibit the No-sale Exchange from domestic currency to foreign
currency.
3. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
CATEND
1.214
CUR2
20.00
*
16.47
CUR2
16.47
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.8
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Keyboard
Each PLU is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price preset) or “OPEN” type (with no price preset).
Perform the operation depending on the type selected.
OPERATION
■ Open PLU Type
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
•
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
1
PLU000001
1.00T
T: Taxable
Symbol
•
|Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
PLU000001
1.00
■ Preset PLU Type
1
TOTAL
DISP3
1.15
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
•
|Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]
•
[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU
■ Preset-price Open Entry through Preset PLU Type
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.9 PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window
9.9
PLU (menu item) Entry through the Menu Window
This register allows you to select and enter a PLU (menu item) through the Menu Window.
OPERATION
■ Through the [DISPLAY] key
[DISPLAY] ......................................................... Displays the corresponding menu table window as follows.
([DISPLAY 1] to [DISPLAY 99])
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
PLU000001
PLU000010
PLU000100
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
↓
↑
Select Enter
Pg dw
■ Through the [PLU] key with the menu table
programmed
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1.00T
[PLU] .............. Displays the corresponding menu
table window as follows.
PLU000001
PLU000010
PLU000100
P
1.00
1
TOTAL
Select Enter
1.15
Pg dw
↓
↑
■ Function Keys while the Menu Window is displayed
[↑] [↓]:
Cursor
[SELECT]:
PLU (menu item) Selection
|Quantity| [SELECT] ([ENTER]): Quantity Selection
[NEXT]:
Screen Skip or Next Screen Request
PLU (menu item) Selection and Entry
[ENTER]:
Operation Example 1)
You select and enter the following item from the menu window shown above.
PLU 000001 (1 item)
[DISPLAY 1]
([SELECT])
[ENTER]
Operation Example 2)
You select and enter the following items from the menu window shown above.
PLU 000010 (1 item), PLU 000100 (3 items)
[DISPLAY 1]
[↓]
([SELECT])
[ENTER]
[↓]
[3]
[SELECT]
[ENTER]
Press once.
Press twice.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.10 Repeat Entry
NOTES:
1. While the menu window is displayed, operate as follows to cancel a PLU (menu item) already
selected by the [SELECT] key.
[0] → [SELECT]
2. While the menu window is displayed, you cannot perform the following sales transactions.
•
•
•
Subtotal Read
Void
Dollar Discount, % Operations
9.10 Repeat Entry
To repeat the same item of the last entry, simply depress the last key of the PLU entry sequence or depress the
[RPT] key.
OPERATION
■ Open PLU Type
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
•
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])
1
1
1
PLU000004
PLU000004
PLU000004
2.00T
2.00T
2.00T
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
•
|Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
PLU000004
3
2.00
■ Preset PLU Type
3
TOTAL
DISP3
7.32
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
•
|Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] [PLU] (or [RPT])
•
[PLU Preset-Code Key] [Same key] (or [RPT])
■ Preset-price Open Repeat
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Price| [AMT] [RPT]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] [RPT]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
NOTES:
1. If the first item of those repeated is modified with [SI/M] or [TX/M], the modified status will be
effective through the last item of the repeated.
2. Please note that the Preset-price Open Repeat can only be performed by the [RPT] key.
3. A negative PLU item cannot be repeated.
9.11 Quantity Extension (Multiplication)
OPERATION
■ Open PLU Type
•
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]
•
|Quantity| [X] |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Open-PLU
■ Preset PLU Type
•
|Quantity| [X] |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU]
•
|Quantity| [X] [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.12 Set Menu Entry
■ Preset-price Open Repeat
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Preset-PLU Code| [PLU] |Quantity| [X] |Price| [AMT]
•
|Quantity| [X] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) |Price| [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU
NOTES:
1. Quantity .................... Max. 3 integral + 3 decimal digits (Use the [ . ] key for entering decimal digits.)
Price (Unit Price) ...... Max. 6 digits
Product ..................... Must not exceed 8 digits.
2. When the Quantity is 1-digit integer (1 to 9) followed by a Code-preset PLU key with a price
preset, the [X] key is omissible.
3. The product obtained by multiplication cannot be repeated.
4. The decimal portion of the Quantity
entry itself is processed down to the two
digits below the decimal point. The
fraction rounding in this case is fixed to
ROUND OFF.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
3
PLU000004
6.00T
5. You can select the rounding process of
the fractions of the product (result of
multiplication) by a program option:
ROUND OFF (initial setting), ROUND
UP, or ROUND DOWN.
PLU000004
3
6.00
3
TOTAL
DISP3
7.32
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.12 Set Menu Entry
Up to 50 set menu tables are available. You can select two kinds of the set menu table; Preset Menu Type and
Open Menu Type.
OPERATION
■ Preset Menu Table Type
•
One Set Menu Entry
PLU Entry of main menu
Sub menu PLUs are automatically entered.
•
Quantity Extension
|Quantity| [X]
PLU Entry of main menu
Sub menu PLUs are automatically multiplied and
entered.
0.001 to 999.999
■ Open Menu Table Type
•
One Set Menu Entry
PLU Entry of main menu
PLU Entries of sub menus
[END]
•
Quantity Extension
|Quantity| [X]
PLU Entry of main menu
PLU Entries of sub menus
[END]
0.001 to 999.999
NOTES:
1. Repeat Entry is not possible for the set
menu items.
2. Modifier Entry is not possible for the set
menu items.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
10.00T
1
1
1
PLU000005
PLU000050
PLU000500
Main Menu
Sub Menus
3. Void Entry is not possible for the set
menu items.
4. As for the Preset Menu Table Type, up
to seven menu items can be
programmed to each table.
PLU000005
3
10.00
10.70
3
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.13 Modifier Entry
5. As for the Open Menu Table Type, if the quantity of sub menu items to be entered is
programmed, the set menu entry is completed when the quantity of sub menu items reaches the
programmed quantity. In this case, depressing the [END] key is unnecessary.
6. As for the Open Menu Table Type, Quantity Extension is available for a sub menu PLU. Even
when a main menu PLU is multiplied by the Quantity Extension, sub menu PLUs will not be
multiplied.
9.13 Modifier Entry
You can select and enter “MODIFIER” PLUs (such as “PEPPER”, “RARE”, “MEDIUM” for grilling a steak item,
and toppings for dishes, etc.).
OPERATION
If no modifier item is required.
Entry of PLU
Entry of PLU which is
programmed for
modifier use
[END]
(menu item) which it
is allowed to enter
the modifier items
Up to 30 modifier PLUs can be entered.
NOTES:
1. The [END] key depression is omissible
in the following cases and the modifier
entry is automatically finalized.
• Ordinary PLU item is entered after
a modifier PLU.
REG
*
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
P1S1
• The [TOTAL] key is operated after a
modifier PLU.
• Sale finalization by the media keys is
performed after a modifier PLU.
2. Quantity Extension is available for a
modifier PLU. Multiplied sales item
count is displayed for a modifier PLU.
When a modifier PLU with preset price
programmed is multiplied by the
Quantity Extension, the preset price will
also be multiplied.
RARE
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
1
1
BEEF STEAK
RARE
PEPPER
15.00
BEEF STEAK
3
15.00
15.00
3
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.14 Other Income PLU Entry
This operation is used to enter items which do not directly become sales for the restaurant, such as postage, gift
wrapping fee, utility (payment of electricity and gas), and donation.
OPERATION
The same key operation as “PLU (menu item) Entry”. However, use the PLU which has been linked to the
Other Income Department.
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry
9.15 PLU Code Shift Entry
Depressing the [CODE SHIFT] key designates and enters a PLU item, adding the printed number (1 to 4) to an
entered PLU code.
OPERATION
[CODE SHIFT 1]
[CODE SHIFT 2]
[CODE SHIFT 3]
[CODE SHIFT 4]
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 1)
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 2)
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 3)
PLU Entry ............................ (To enter a PLU item of the entered code plus 4)
Example) When the PLU code 7 is designated after the [CODE SHIFT 2] is depressed, this sales transaction
will result in the sales item entry of the PLU code 9.
NOTES:
1. Depressing the [C] key immediately
after the [CODE SHIFT] key results in
the cancellation of the PLU Code Shift
Entry.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
2. You can depress the [CODE SHIFT]
key any number of times before the PLU
Entry. The last depressed [CODE
SHIFT] key becomes effective.
3. Function of the [CODE SHIFT] key is
effective for the next PLU Entry only.
CODE SHIFT2
0.00
TOTAL
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP3
DISP4
9.16 PLU Price Shift Entry
Up to five different unit prices can be programmed for each PLU and you can select either of the following two
features.
9.16.1 Price Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature
OPERATION
(PLU entries)
[PRICE 2]
to
PLU entry ....................... After the PLU Entry, the price
mode automatically returns to
[PRICE 5]
the 1st price mode.
with shifted price
with the 1st price
Price shift declaration
9.16.2 Price Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Price Level” Feature
You can shift the PLU price level to another in the following three cases.
•
•
•
Using the [PRICE] key
The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted price level is held
until another [PRICE] key is depressed.
Using the Hourly Range Designation
Hourly range to start shifting each price level can be programmed. If programmed, the price level will be
automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.
Using the Price Level for each Customer
Price level can be programmed to each customer. PLU entry will be performed on the basis of the
programmed information. For details, refer to the section 9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track on page 9-20.
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry
NOTE: A program option allows you to prohibit
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
operating the [PRICE] key in the REG mode.
PRICE SHIFT3
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.17 Combo (Combination) Sale Entry
This operation is used to perform the special discount (%-, Dollar Discount, Free of Charge) to the PLU Entry on
the basis of the Combo Table information. You can select either of the following two features.
■ Manual Combo Sale Entry Feature
Combo sale entry becomes effective and is performed only when you depress the [COMBO] key before the sale
finalization.
■ Automatic Combo Sale Entry Feature
Combo sale entry is automatically performed when the sale transaction is finalized. To temporarily prohibit the
combo sale entry, the use of the [COMBO] key is effective.
OPERATION
Depress the [COMBO] key any time before ........... When the combo sale entry is effective, the descriptor
the sale finalization.
“COMBO” is displayed on the operator display. When not
effective, the descriptor disappears. The descriptor “DISC” is
displayed when the special discount is performed.
NOTE: In the combo sale entry, the 1st preset price
programmed for each PLU is used. Also in this
entry, only the preset-price PLUs can be used.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
COMBO DISC
PLU000001
PLU000008
P1S1
1.00T
9.50T
10.50
-4.75
5.75
1
1
SUBTL
COMBO DISC
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
0.82
6.57
CASH
6.57
6.57
2
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.18 Scale Entry
OPERATION
(Scale entry is allowed only for the scale type PLUs)
9.18.1 Automatic Scale Entry (without tare or by the tare automatic subtraction)
•
Through Preset-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.
([SCALE])
(M)
|Preset PLU Code| [PLU]
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.19 Subtotal Read
•
Through Open-PLU: Place the item on the scale platter.
([SCALE])
(M)
|Open-PLU Code| [PLU] |Unit Price| [AMT]
per Unit Weight
NOTE: When the PLU is programmed with a Tare Table No., the tare weight is automatically subtracted from
the scaled weight, and thus only the net weight is processed.
9.18.2 Scale Entry by entering the Tare Table No.
|Tare Table No.| [TARE]
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two
operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.
1 to 9
9.18.3 Scale Entry by manually entering the Tare Weight
|Tare Weight| [MANUAL TARE]
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the above two
operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.
Any value other than 0,
however, less than the
weight of scaled item
9.18.4 Manual Scale Entry
|Net Weight| of the item
1 to 99999
[SCALE]
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in the
above two operations of the Automatic Scale Entry.
(unit: g or 1/100 LB. for example, enter 5 for 0.05LB.)
9.18.5 Scale Entry for the Void Item
[VOID]
to be continued to the top of the “Manual Scale Entry” sequence above.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
SCALE
0.999
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.19 Subtotal Read
You can select one of the following three types of subtotal.
9.19.1 Tax included Subtotal
Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The sales subtotal including tax will be displayed.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.20 Tray Total Read
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
1.00T
1
PLU000001
SUBTL
1.10
1
TOTAL
DISP3
1.10
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.19.2 Net Subtotal (tax not included)
Depress the [ST] key any time during the sales transaction. The net sales subtotal (excluding tax) will be
displayed.
9.19.3 Eat-in/Takeout Subtotal
Depress the [EAT IN] or the [TAKEOUT] key before the sale transaction is finalized. The register calculates and
displays the subtotal according to the programmed Eat-in/Takeout tax status.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
PLU000015
25.00T
SUBTL
CASH
25.00
25.00
TAKE OUT
*
*
CASH
25.00
25.00
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.20 Tray Total Read
Depress the [TRAY TOTAL] key after entering PLU items. The contents of the tray total itemizer which include
tax is displayed.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
1
TAX
TRAY TL
PLU000001
PLU000010
1.00T
1.50
0.25
2.75
TRAY TL
2.75
2
TOTAL
DISP3
2.75
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.21 Item Correct
9.21 Item Correct
If you make an incorrect entry in the following sales transactions, depress the [ITEM CORR] key to delete the last
entered item.
OPERATION
PLU ENTRY
REPEAT ENTRY
QUANTITY EXTENSION
DOLLAR DISCOUNT
PERCENT CHARGE/DISCOUNT
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT
PAID-OUT
[ITEM CORR]
NOTES:
1. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Repeat Entry, only the last item of those repeated will
be deleted.
2. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after the Quantity Extension entry, the entire product (result of
multiplication) will be deleted.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
PLU000007
12.00T
CORR
1
12.00
14.04
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.22 Void (Designated Line Voiding and Returned Merchandise)
This operation deletes a PLU item (not necessarily the last entered item) already entered in the sales transaction.
It is also used outside a sale to return an item already purchased.
OPERATION
■ Void through the [PLU] key
Depress the [VOID] key prior to or any time during the entry sequence of the following operations:
PLU Entries (except Repeat Entry)
Percent Discount/Charge on a PLU item
■ Void through the Operator Display
Depress the [VOID] key at any point.
[↑]
(|Quantity|)
[ENTER]
[↓]
[PAGE UP]
[PAGE DOWN]
To delete the items by
the Quantity Extension
Select the item
to be deleted.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.23 All Void
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
1
1
PLU000007
PLU000008
12.00T
9.50T
VOID
1
*
*
PLU000007
-12.00T
PLU000007
-12.00
10.17
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.23 All Void
When the current sales transaction now being entered must be canceled before the sale finalization, the All Void
operation is effective.
OPERATION
[ITEM CORR] to execute ALL VOID
Sale Item Entries
[ALL VOID]
[C] to cancel ALL VOID
NOTE: You cannot perform the All Void if the sales
items of 31 or more have already been entered
in the sales transaction.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
1.00T
1
1
1
1
1
PLU000001
PLU000010
PLU000100
PLU000002
PLU000020
1.50T
2.00T
3.00T
3.50T
11.00
SUBTL
ALL VD
*
*
ALL VD
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.24 Order Entry Control
You can select either of the following two features.
9.24.1 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Manual Entry)
OPERATION
■ To start new order table:
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]
[TOTAL] ................................... only to reserve order table
1 to 999.9
See (1)
PLU (menu items) entries
[TOTAL] ................................... to enter order items, with
balance forward
See (2)
Sale finalization by.................... to enter order items, with
the media keys
payment of the check
See (3)
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.24 Order Entry Control
■ To cancel the order table already reserved:
|Order Table No. in reservation| [START CHECK]
[AT/TL]
See (4)
■ To enter order items for the reserved order table, or to enter additional order items for the order table in use:
|Order Table No. in reservation or in use| [START CHECK]
PLU (menu items) entries
See (5)
9.24.2 Order Entry Control (Order Table No. Automatic Entry)
OPERATION
■ To start new order table:
[START CHECK]
PLU (menu items) entries
[TOTAL]............... to enter order items,
with balance forward
See (2)
Order Table No. is
automatically created.
Sale finalization.... to enter order items,
by the media
keys
with payment of the
check
See (3)
■ To enter additional order items for the order table No. in use:
(|Order Table No. in use|) [RECALL]
PLU (menu items) entries
See (5)
Omissible; NOTE 2 below
NOTES:
1. You cannot perform the following sales transactions after entering the order table No.
• No-sale, Received-on-Account, Paid Out
• Negative PLU Entry
• All Void
• Tray Total Read
• Percent Charge/Discount and Dollar Discount on PLU item
2. Entry of the order table No. before depressing the [RECALL] key is omissible. In this case, the
oldest-recorded order table No. among all of the opened order tables will be read out.
(1)
(2)
REG
TABLE NO
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
*
*
001
P1S1
TABLE NO
PLU000001
PLU000010
001
P1S1
1.00T
10.00T
1
1
RESERVATION001
NEW BALANCE001
0.00
11.90
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
2
TOTAL
DISP3
11.90
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.
(3)
(4)
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
REG
TABLE NO
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
*
*
TABLE NO
PLU000001
PLU000010
001
P1S1
1.00T
001
P1S1
1
1
10.00T
11.00
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
0.90
11.90
CASH
CANCEL
001
11.90
11.90
0.00
2
TOTAL
DISP3
0
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
(5)
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
TABLE NO
PLU000001
PLU000010
001
P1S1
1.00T
1
1
10.00T
SUBTL
11.90
11.90
2
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.25 Order Entry Control with Table No.
OPERATION
Enter the Table No. and depress the
[POSITION #] at either point.
|Table No.| [POSITION #]
1 to 999.9
(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK])
PLU (menu items) entries
Sale finalization by the
media keys
1 to 999.9
Omissible if unnecessary
REG
2’ nd NO.
1
SUBTL
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
005
P1S1
10.00T
10.00
PLU000010
TAX
CASH
0.80
10.80
CASH
10.80
10.80
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion
9.26 Temporary Release of Order Table No. Entry Compulsion
This operation releases one sales transaction from the compulsory status of the order table No. entry. It is
effective only when the program option “Compulsion of the Order Table No. Entry” has been programmed.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
PLU (menu items) Entries
[PUB MODE]
NOTE: After finalizing the sale, the status of the Order
Table No. entry compulsion is automatically
resumed.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
Non TAB
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.27 Guest Check Merge
Two different guest check accounts can be merged together.
OPERATION
|Order Table No.| [CHECK MERGE]
|Order Table No.|
[CHECK MERGE]
[C] to cancel
Enter the order table No. of which
account is transferred to another.
Enter the order table
No. of the destination.
NOTES:
1. This operation is available only to the
opened order table account. Entry of
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
TABLE NO
MERGE
INTO
002
P1S1
1
2
unopened or reserved order table No.
causes an error.
2. If the item buffers of the two order tables
to be merged exceed 100, this operation
will result in an error.
NEW BALANCE002
22.52
4
TOTAL
DISP3
22.52
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.28 Guest Check Transfer
Guest check account can be transferred to another of the order table not in use.
OPERATION
|Order Table No.| [CHECK TRANS.]
|Order Table No.|
[CHECK TRANS.]
[C] to cancel
Old Order Table No.
New Order Table No.
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.29 Guest Check Split
NOTES:
1. As for the old order table, you can use
REG
TABLE NO
TRANSFER
INTO
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
002
P1S1
reserved or opened one. As for the new
order table, you can use reserved or
unopened one.
1
2
2. When the register adopts the feature
“Order Entry Control by automatic entry
of the Order Table No.”, you cannot
enter the new order table No. and it will
be automatically designated.
TABLE TRANS002
43.20
4
TOTAL
DISP3
43.20
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.29 Guest Check Split
Guest check account can be partially transferred to another of the order table not in use.
OPERATION
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]
PLU (menu item)
Entries (NOTE 1
below)
Enter the order table No. of
which account is partially
transferred to another.
Enter the order table
No. of the destination.
[C] to cancel
[TOTAL]
NOTES:
1. You can only enter the sales items which have been stored in the item buffer of the order table of
which account is transferred.
2. When the register adopts the feature “Order Entry Control by automatic entry of the Order Table
No.”, you cannot enter the order table No. of the destination and it will be automatically
designated.
3. After the PLU entries, you can check the contents of the two order tables using the [←] and [→]
keys.
If a guest wants to pay the check partially or entirely.....
|Order Table No.| [SPLIT CHECK]
PLU (menu item) Entries
[→]
Sale finalization by the
media keys
Enter the order table
No. of which account is
partially or entirely paid.
REG
TABLE NO
SPLIT
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
001
P1S1
1
2
4
PLU000010
40.00T
NEW BALANCE002
43.20
4
TOTAL
DISP3
43.20
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)
9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of a Sale)
OPERATION
Paid in One Media:
Totalling (no change calculation)
[Media]
Tendering (with change calculation)
|Amount Tendered| [Media]
Paid by Credit Card:
|Code for Credit Card Company| [CARD No.]
1 to 12
•
•
•
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]
|Order Table No.| [RECALL]
PLU (menu item) Entries
- - -
- - -
(|Amount Tendered|) [Chg]
Multi-tender (Short-tender repeated by the same media):
|1st Amount Tendered| [Media]
|2nd Amount Tendered| [Same Media]
(|Last Amount Tendered|) [Same Media]
Split-tender (Short-tender repeated by different medias):
|Check Amount Tendered Portion| [CHECK]
|Media-Coupon Amount Tendered Portion| [CPN]
(|Cash Amount Tendered Portion|) [AT/TL]
NOTE: If the [TENDER UP] key is installed on the
keyboard, the cash tendering operation
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
SUBTL
TOTAL
CATEND
CHANGE
PLU000010
7.00T
corresponding to the sales total will be
automatically performed by depressing its key.
7.00
7.00
10.00
3.00
Example)
The following value is
programmed to the Tender Up
table:
$5.00, $10.00 and $20.00
CHANGE
3.00
7.00
When you depress the [TENDER UP] key for
the sale total $7.00, the cash tendering
operation by $10.00 will be automatically
performed.
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.31 Charge Posting by Check Track
This operation is used for the charge posting, and the entry of customer code reads out the customer account
balance.
OPERATION
|Customer Code| [PICKUP BAL]
Code already opened
PLU (menu item) Entries
[CREDIT 5]
|New Customer Code| [CODE OPEN]
Max. 12 digits Code not yet opened
Customer Card reading through the MCR
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies
NOTE: If the PLU price level is programmed to each
customer, the PLU (menu item) entry will be
fixedly performed by the corresponding price
level. In this case, using the [PRICE] key to
change the level causes an error, and also the
hourly range price level is ignored if
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
No999999999999
Customer
Code
SMITH
100.00
programmed.
SMITH
100.00
100.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.32 Sale Paid in Foreign Currencies
OPERATION
[ST]
[CUR1]
Amount Tendered in [CUR1]
[AT/TL]
Foreign Currency
|
Mandatory for
a sale paid in
foreign
Displays the
equivalent value
in Foreign
Other media keys may
be used if paid in that
media. (The media
key must be
programmed to allow
tendering in this case.)
Displays the
domestic
currency value
equivalent to the
tendered foreign
currency.
Display the entered
foreign currency
amount.
currencies.
Currency 1.
NOTES:
1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate
the same as [CUR 1], except that each
of these keys has its own exchange rate
programmed corresponding to each
foreign currency.
2. Multi-tendering with the same foreign
currency or Split-tendering with other
medias or foreign currencies are
possible.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
SUBTL
TAX
TOTAL
CUR1
20.00
1.60
21.60
100.00
0.365
*
CATEND
CHANGE
36.50
14.90
CHANGE
14.90
21.60
3. The foreign currency keys cannot be
used to finalize Received-on-Account
payments, or Paid-out items.
2
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
4. When a tendering by a foreign currency occurs after a short-tendered condition, the [ST] key will
not be mandatory.
5. A sale of zero or negative balance cannot be finalized using any of the foreign currency keys.
9.33 Media Transfer
This operation is used to change a media already paid and finalized into a different one.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
|Amount| [Source Media]
Enter the amount
[Destination Media]
of the media to be
transferred.
Depress the media
key of the destination.
[C]
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.34 Tax Status Modification
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
CHANGE
*
CHANGE
INTO
*
CPN
CASH
10.00
CASH
10.00
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.34 Tax Status Modification
Tax status of the PLU or required key is reversed:
OPERATION
Depress the [TX1/M] to [TX4/M] of which tax status is to be modified prior to or any time (before the final key
at the latest) during the entry sequence of the following operations. More than one modifier key can be
depressed for the same item entry:
PLU Entries
Percent Discount/Charge
Dollar Discount
NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the [TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax status modification
using those keys is not allowed.
9.35 Automatic Tax Calculation
When the tax table (or tax rate) and the tax status of each PLU have been programmed for the register, the tax
calculation is automatically performed on any taxable PLU item.
9.36 Manual Tax Entry
The register allows you to manually enter the tax after the PLU entries.
OPERATION
|Irregular Tax Amount to be Added| [TAX]
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
PLU000001
1.00T
TAX5
0.12
TAX5
0.12
1
TOTAL
DISP3
1.12
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.37 Tax Exemption
9.37 Tax Exemption
OPERATION
■ Selective Tax Exemption
Examples) [TX1/M] [EX]
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 from the sale
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1 & Tax 2 from
the sale
Sale Finalization ........to exempt Tax 1, Tax 2 and Tax
3 from the sale
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [EX]
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [EX]
■ All Tax Exemption
[EX]
Sale Finalization
Sale Finalization
to exempt all the
taxes from the sale
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [TX4/M] [EX]
NOTE: If the inclusive-tax feature is selected to the
[TX3/M] and [TX4/M] keys, the tax exemption
of Tax 3 and Tax 4 is not allowed.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
1
TAX2EX
PLU000010
10.00T
10.00
TOTAL
10.00
10.00
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.38 Listing Capacity Open
■ For Departments and PLUs
Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key prior to or any time during the PLU entry (including REPEAT and
QUANTITY EXTENSION entries). Please note that the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key must be pressed, at the latest,
before the final key of the entry sequence. The High Amount Limit for the PLU will be extended with two higher
digits, and the Low Amount Limit will be extended with one lower digit. For entering an amount still exceeding
these limits, you must call for Manager Intervention.
■ For Media Tender Amounts
Depress the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key before or after the tender amount entry. The High Amount Limit for the
media tendering will be extended with one higher digit. For entering an amount still exceeding this limit, you must
call for Manager Intervention.
9.39 Selective Itemizer (SI) Status Modification
Depress the [SI/M] ([SI1/M], [SI2/M]) key for entering the required PLU item, the same way as [LC OPEN] is
operated. The SI-net status is reversed to non-net status, and vice versa.
9.40 Selective Itemizer (SI) Total Read
Depressing the [SI/TL] key during the sales transaction displays the selective itemizer total calculated.
OPERATION
PLU (menu item) Entry
[SI/TL]
([SI1/TL], [SI/2/TL])
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read
NOTE: Selective Itemizer Total Read after the order
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
7.50TS
-0.75
table No. entry is possible.
1
SI1 TL
PLU000030
S: SI-net
Symbol
SI1 TL
-0.75
8.10
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.41 PLU Preset Price Read
You can check the preset price of each PLU.
OPERATION
■ [READ]
(Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)
([PRICE])
|PLU Code| [PLU]
for the shift of price level
■ [READ]
([PRICE])
[PLU Preset-Code Key]
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
for the shift of
price level
([MENU])
for the shift of keyboard phase
READ PLU000030
7.50
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.42 PLU Stock Read
You can check the current stock of each PLU.
OPERATION
■ [STOCK] |PLU Code| [PLU]
■ [STOCK] ([MENU])
(Any time inside or outside a sale, but prohibited during a short-tendered condition.)
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
[PLU Preset-Code Key]
for the shift of keyboard phase
STOCK PLU000030
120.
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.43 Dollar Discount
9.43 Dollar Discount
OPERATION
PLU item entry
(for discount from an individual item)
|Amount| [DISC]
Max. 7 digits
1 to 9999999
[ST]
(for discount from the sale total)
NOTES:
1. Discount from the sale total
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
10.00T
•
An amount exceeding the sale total
cannot be entered without the “Credit
Balance” option. However, the
amount exceeding the sale total
cannot be entered even with the
“Credit Balance” option when the
sales transaction includes the order
table No. entry.
1
DISC
PLU000010
-0.10
DISC
-0.10
10.70
•
•
After the Dollar Discount entry,
additional item entry cannot be
performed.
Dollar Discount can be performed
only once in a sale.
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
2. Discount from an individual item
•
Dollar Discount can be performed only when the sales transaction does not include the order
table No. entry.
9.44 Percent Discount, Percent Charge
OPERATION
PLU entry
[%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the preset rate)
[ST]
|Rate| [%-] (or [%+]) (% operation by the manual rate)
0.001 to 99.999
NOTES:
1. You can perform the manual rate %
operation by manually entering a % rate
even when the preset rate has been
programmed on the [%] key.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
PLU000010
10.00T
%-
5%
-0.50
2. % operation for the sale total
•
After the % operation, additional item
entry cannot be performed.
% operation can be performed only
once in a sale.
•
%-
-0.50
10.30
3. % operation for an individual item
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
•
% operation can be performed only
when the sales transaction does not
include the order table No. entry.
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.45 Non-add Number Print
9.45 Non-add Number Print
Non-add numbers can be entered for future reference, to indicate guest code, media checks, credit cards, etc.
The entered numbers do not affect any sale total data.
OPERATION
(allowed any time during a sale or transaction)
|Number| [#]
Max. 18 digits
NOTES:
1. A program option allows you to prohibit
operating the No-sale transaction after
entering a non-add number.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
#123000
2. Non-add number print immediately after
entering the order table No. is not
possible.
#
1230.00
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.46 Number-of-guests Entry
Number of the guests of sale can be entered.
OPERATION
(allowed any time during a sale or transaction)
|Number of Guests| [GUEST #]
Max. 3 digits
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
GUEST
PLU000010
10.00T
2CU
NOTE: When you enter the number of the guests
more than once, the last entered number will
be effective.
GUEST
0.02
10.80
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.47 Function Key Entry
Once you depress the [FUNCTION] key, the programmed key operation sequence is automatically performed.
OPERATION
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
1
SUBTL
%-
PLU000001
PLU000020
1.00T
8.50T
9.50
[FUNCTION]
5%
-0.48
[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 20]
Example) Key operation sequence shown below has
been previously programmed on the
[FUNCTION 1] key:
SUBTL
10.65
10.65
2
TOTAL
DISP3
[1] [PLU] [2] [0] [PLU] [ST] [5] [%-]
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.48 Tip Paid
9.48 Tip Paid
When a guest pays the tip by credit card, this operation can divide the tip and pay it to each cashier in cash.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
REG
2CL
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
2
P1S1
TIP PAID
CASH
|Cashier Code| [TIP PAID]
|Tip Amount|
Max. 7 digits
[AT/TL]
10.00
CASH
10.00
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.49 Charge Tip
OPERATION
(|Order Table No.| [START CHECK])
PLU (menu item) Entry
|Tip Amount| [CHARGE TIP]
Max. 7 digits
Payment Entry using the media as the tip.
NOTE: You cannot use the [AT/TL] key for the first
tender operation after depressing the
[CHARGE TIP] key.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
CHG TIP
PLU000010
10.00T
0.50
CHG TIP
0.50
1
TOTAL
DISP3
11.30
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.50 Received-on-Account
A received-on-account transaction is used to identify money which is in the drawer but not from the daily
business.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
([ST])
|Amount of Payment| [R/A]
|Cash Amount Tendered| [AT/TL]
Max. 7 digits
(if paid in cash)
(|Quantity| [X])
Repeatable if multiple amounts are received.
|Check Amount Tendered| [CHECK]
(if paid in check)
[Chg] (if processed into general charge account)
Other Media Finalization
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.51 Paid-Out
NOTES:
1. The media keys used for this operation
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
must be programmed to allow received-
on-account entries.
2. A received-on-account transaction after
an order table No. entry is not possible.
R/A
R/A
SUBTL
CASH
5.00
10.00
15.00
15.00
CASH
15.00
15.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.51 Paid-Out
A paid-out transaction is used when money is removed from the drawer without totaling to a sale.
OPERATION (must be operated outside a sale)
|Amount to be paid out| [PO] ([ST])
[AT/TL]
Max. 7 digits
Repeatable if multiple amounts are paid out.
NOTES:
1. Only the [AT/TL] key can finalize a paid-
out transaction (i.e. must be paid out in
cash).
2. A paid-out transaction after an order
table No. entry is not possible.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
10.00
10.00
PO
SUBTL
TOTAL
10.00
TOTAL
10.00
10.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.52 Print Mode Invert
When the option “Single/Double Print” is selected for the RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt, the [INVERT] key
operation can temporarily change the print mode to “Itemized Print”.
OPERATION
Pattern 1: To enter all the PLU items in the itemized mode
[INVERT]
PLU entries
[TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has been started
with an order table No. entry) or Sale finalization by the media
keys
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut
Pattern 2: To enter only the designated PLU items in the itemized mode
PLU entries
[INVERT]
PLU entries
[INVERT]
Issues an Itemized receipt for all the items entered here.
Issues a Single/
Double receipt for
each item entry.
(PLU entries)
[TOTAL] (only when the sales transaction has
been started with an order table No. entry) or
Sale finalization by the media keys
Issues a Single/
Double receipt for
each item entry.
NOTES:
1. When the option “Itemized Print” is
selected, the Print Mode Invert
operation is not possible.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
2. The Itemized Print Mode once declared
by the [INVERT] key is automatically
cancelled by a finalizing operation (by
[TOTAL] or media keys).
0.00
0.00
INV
DISP1
TOTAL
DISP3
Invert
Indicator
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
9.53 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Receipt Cut
This operation issues an RKP (remote kitchen printer) receipt while the print mode is in the “itemized print”.
OPERATION
([INVERT]
) PLU entries
[RKP CUT] ...................................... An RKP receipt is issued.
Necessary for the
“Single/Double
Print” option
PLU data is stored
in the RKP printer
buffer.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
PLU000001
1.00T
RKP CUT
0.00
1
TOTAL
DISP3
1.10
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print
9.54 RKP (remote kitchen printer) Message Print
This operation prints a message on the RKP.
OPERATION
RKP Print
■ [RKP Msg]
([RKP Msg 1] to [RKP Msg 10])
■ |Message No.| [RKP Msg #]
1 to 20
11-23-1999 TUE
#0
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE
PROGRAMMABLE!
1CL
0209 16:30TM
This operation is possible during a sales transaction.
ex.) PLU Entry [RKP Msg] PLU Entry
NOTES:
1. A message programmed in the RKP
Message Table is printed on the RKP.
No print occurs on receipt.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE
PROGRAMMABLE!
2. A message output to the RKP consists
of double-sized characters.
RKP Msg
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.55 Guest Check Print
A guest check print is required when a sales transaction with an order table No. entry has been finalized by the
media keys (for payment).
OPERATION
Case 1: When the option “Guest check is printed on the receipt roll paper” has been selected:
When a sales transaction is finalized by the media keys (for payment), a guest check will be
automatically issued from the receipt.
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.56 Check Print
Case 2: When the option “Guest check is printed on the slip” has been selected:
When a sale transaction is finalized by the media keys.
A slip has already been placed
on the slip table of the BRST-10
and the “SLIP” lamp on the
BRST-10 is illuminated.
A slip has not been placed on the slip table yet.
A guest check print is automatically started.
A guidance message “Please set paper.” is displayed
on the operator display.
When you want to
print a guest check
on a slip.
When you want to
print a guest check
on the receipt roll
paper.
Insert a slip into the
Depress the
slip slot to illuminate
the “SLIP” lamp, and
a guest check print is
automatically started.
[RECEIPT PRINT]
key.
NOTE: If a guest check print requires two slips or more, the “SLIP” lamp starts to blink after auto-ejecting a slip
which has just been printed. In this case, insert a new slip and the guest check print is automatically
restarted.
Guest Check Receipt
Guest Check Slip
TABLE NO
1
11-24-1999 WED #0
TABLE NO
1
11-24-1999 WED #0
1
1
PLU000010
PLU000020
10.00T
8.50T
1
1
PLU000010
PLU000020
10.00T
8.50T
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
18.50
2.33
20.83
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
18.50
2.33
20.83
1CL
0276 12:52TM
1CL
0280
12:53TM
9.56 Check Print
You can issue a presentation for a sale transaction which has been temporarily finalized by the [TOTAL] key.
OPERATION
|Table No.| [PRINT CHECK]
1 to 999.9
When your receipt printer is the TM-T88 or the TM-300, a
presentation print is automatically started.
When your receipt printer is the BRST-10, the print procedure is the
same as that of “Guest Check Print” shown on the preceding page.
NOTES:
1. The header “PRESENTATION” is printed at the top of a presentation. This operation can be
operated any number of times for the same order table No. The receipt consecutive No. is not
printed. Additional PLU items, if any, can still be entered after issuing a presentation.
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)
2. A program option allows you to use a presentation as a real guest check. If so programmed, the
header “PRESENTATION” is not printed. After issuing a guest check, only the sale finalization by
the media keys is allowed for the order table No.
Used as a presentation
Used as a real guest check
TABLE NO
3
11-24-1999 WED #0
TABLE NO
3
11-24-1999 WED #0
10.00T
PRESENTATION
PLU000010
1
1
PLU000010
PLU000020
*********
******
*********
******
10.00T
8.50T
1
1
8.50T
PLU000020
SUBTL
TAX
TOTAL
18.50
2.33
20.83
SUBTL
TAX
TOTAL
18.50
2.33
20.83
1CL
0355 18:23TM
1CL
18:23TM
Consecutive No. is printed
The header “PRESENTATION” is printed.
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
9.57.1 Receipt Reprint
■ Operated while the receipt-issue status is “ON”.
A sale transaction is
finalized by the media
keys.
A receipt for the
sale is issued.
[RECEIPT ISSUE] .............. A copy receipt
for the sale which
has just been
finalized is issued.
■ Operated while the receipt-issue status is “OFF”.
A sale transaction is finalized
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ....................A receipt for the sale which has just
by the media keys.
been finalized is issued.
Programmable options:
•
•
A post-issue receipt operation after issuing an ordinary receipt is prohibited.
A post-issue receipt is always issued as a total-only receipt. If this option is not selected then the post-issue
receipt will be an itemized-receipt for a sales transaction of which print lines are below 50 or less. When the
print lines exceeds 50, a post-issue receipt becomes a total-only receipt.
•
Operation of a post-issue receipt can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then the
operation can be performed only once.
NOTE: A post-issue receipt for the received-on-account or the paid-out transaction cannot be issued.
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.57 Receipt Post-issue (Receipt Reprint & Guest Check Reprint)
9.57.2 Guest Check Reprint
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK]
1 to 999.9
PLU items are
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ............ A copy guest
entered and a
guest check is
issued by a
check for the
sale which has
just been
sales transaction
finalized by the
media keys.
finalized is
issued.
The following operation is allowed when the program option “Presentation is used as a real guest check” has
been selected.
|Order Table No.| [PRINT CHECK]
1 to 999.9
A guest check
is issued.
[RECEIPT ISSUE] ........... A copy guest
check is issued.
Programmable option:
•
Operation of the guest check print can be performed any number of times. If this option is not selected then
the operation can be performed only once.
Ordinary Receipt
Post-issue Receipt
11-23-1999 TUE
#0
11-23-1999 TUE
#0
1
1
PLU000010
PLU000020
10.00T
8.50T
18.50
COPY
***
**
***
**
1
1
PLU000010
PLU000020
10.00T
8.50T
18.50
2.33
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
2.33
20.83
SUBTL
TAX
CASH
20.83
ITEM
1CL
2
0378 11:56TM
ITEM
1CL
2
0378 11:56TM
A copy receipt header is printed
when a post-issue receipt is
issued after an ordinary receipt.
“INV COPY” is printed as a
copy guest check header.
The receipt consecutive No. printed on a post-issue receipt is
the same as that of an ordinary receipt.
9.58 Server Transfer
Account of order tables which are handled by a cashier can be partially or entirely transferred to another cashier’s
account.
OPERATION
(must be operated outside a sale)
When all the accounts which appears in the operator display
are transferred.
|Cashier Code| [SERVER TRANS.]
[AT/TL]
[↓] or [↑]
[SELECT]
[C] to cancel
Enter the cashier
code of the
destination
To select an account you want
to transfer, move the cursor to it
using the [↓] or the [↑] key, then
depress the [SELECT] key.
Repeatable if multiple accounts are transferred.
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
SERVER TRANSFER
2
P1S1
8.50
10.00
18.50
2
1
3
TOTAL
ITEM
SERVER TRANSFER
0.00
2
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
This operation records working total hours of each employee.
OPERATION
■ Clock-in
(must be operated outside a sale)
Through the operator display
Select your job from a
menu window using
[IN]
|Employee No.|
1 to 9999
[SERVER #]
or
[ENTER] ....... Clock-in time is
recorded.
[ENTER]
the [↓] or the [↑] key.
Through the keyboard
A menu window appears.
|Job No.|
1 to 10
REG
CLOCK IN
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
0001
P1S1
01 CASHIER
02 COOK
03 SERVER
Jobs assigned to
each employee
0.01
TOTAL
Enter
0.00
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
■ Break-in
[BREAK IN]
|Employee No.|
[SERVER #]
or
[ENTER] ................. Break-in time is
recorded.
[ENTER]
REG
BREAK IN
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
0001
P1S1
Please verify name and hit Enter.
0.01
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. TRANSACTION ENTRIES
9.59 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
■ Break-out
[BREAK OUT]
|Employee No.|
[SERVER #]
or
[ENTER] ............... Break-out time is
recorded.
[ENTER]
REG
BREAK OUT
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
0001
P1S1
Please verify name and hit Enter.
0.01
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
■ Clock-out
[OUT]
|Employee No.|
[SERVER #]
or
[ENTER] ............... Clock-out time is
recorded.
[ENTER]
REG
CLOCK OUT
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
0001
P1S1
Please verify name and hit Enter.
0.01
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
NOTES:
1. This operation is allowed only when the program options “Employee Management Adopted” and
“Floating Cashier Adopted” have been selected.
2. Clock-in/clock-out entry is allowed up to three times in a day.
3. Data of working total hours of each employee is collected to the employee clock-in/clock-out
report.
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
IN CASE OF A POWER FAILURE
If a power failure occurs during business hours, all the sales data stored in the memory will be
automatically protected by the battery installed in the register. When the power returns, the
register will resume displaying the screen which had been displayed just before the power failure.
The following are possible causes and countermeasures against typical problems. When a problem occurs, refer to
this chapter to find a cause of the problem, then take appropriate countermeasures. If a problem not described here
occurs, or a problem still exists after taking the following countermeasures, ask the store manager to contact your
authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance. In this case, inform the store manager of your problem in
detail.
1. Problems concerning the Power Supply
2. Problems concerning the Keyboard
3. Problems concerning the Drawer
4. Problems concerning the Display
5. Problems during Normal Operations
WARNING!
If you cannot solve a problem with the following solutions, do not attempt to repair it yourself.
Turn the power off, then contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.
10.1 Problems concerning the Power Supply
■ Power is not turned ON.
Cause 1:
Register is not plugged in.
Action:
Plug in an outlet.
Cause 2:
Action:
The power switch provided to the register is in the OFF position.
Turn the power switch ON.
Cause 3:
Action:
The outlet does not supply the power.
Use another outlet.
10.2 Problems concerning the Keyboard
■ Key on the keyboard does not function.
Cause 1:
Mode Lock is in the OFF position.
Action:
Turn the Mode Lock to the positions other than OFF using the Mode Selector Key.
Cause 2:
Action:
Failure of the keyboard itself
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer
10.3 Problems concerning the Drawer
■ Drawer does not open.
Cause 1:
Drawer blocked by foreign substance (coin, etc.).
Action:
Try to open the drawer by removing the foreign substance, using a ruler or something. If you are still
unable to open the drawer ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC
representative for assistance.
Cause 2:
Action:
Failure of the drawer itself
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.
10.4 Problems concerning the Display
10.4.1 Operator Display
■ Display blank.
Cause 1:
Register is not securely plugged in.
Action:
Securely plug in an outlet.
Cause 2:
Action:
The operator display is in the power-save mode.
Depress any key.
Cause 3:
Action:
The brightness control provided to the operator display is adjusted improperly.
Adjust it properly.
Cause 4:
Action:
Failure of the LCD
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.
10.4.2 Customer Display
■ Some segment is not displayed, display shimmers, or illumination of the display is uneven.
Cause 1:
Failure of the display tube
Action:
Ask the store manager to contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.
10.5 Problems during Normal Operations
NOTE on changing the Mode Lock position:
Changing the Mode Lock position during sales entries or programming causes an error. To clear the error, return
the Mode Lock to the original position. However, changing the Mode Lock position to the OFF does not cause an
error. Error caused by changing the Mode Lock position cannot be cleared by the [C] key.
■ Normal operations cannot be carried out.
Cause 1:
Action:
Mode Lock position does not correspond to the operation you attempted.
Check whether or not the Mode Lock position corresponds to the operation. (Especially, check
whether or not the operation you attempted requires the MGR position. Ask your manager about the
operations which requires the MGR position.)
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. STAND-ALONE LEVEL
MANAGER’S GUIDE
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOC 2
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION ............................................................................1-1
1.1
1.2
Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention......................................................1-1
Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions ........................................................1-2
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE ....................................2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Pick Up Operation............................................................................................................2-1
Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method) ......................................................2-1
Enforced Clock-out of an Employee ................................................................................2-2
PLU Menu Shift Entry ......................................................................................................2-2
RKP Table Change ..........................................................................................................2-3
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE ........................................................................3-1
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS ............................................................4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
How to Access a Report Item ..........................................................................................4-1
Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out .....................................................................4-8
Combination Reports .......................................................................................................4-9
General Notes on Report Takings .................................................................................4-10
Report Sample Format ..................................................................................................4-10
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................5-1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Before you enter the SET Mode ......................................................................................5-1
Character Entries .............................................................................................................5-2
Condition Required for Programming Operations............................................................5-4
How to Access a Program Item .......................................................................................5-5
■ Store Name/Message, Commercial Message,
Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1) ....................................................5-7
■ Cashier Programming (Submode 2) ...........................................................................5-8
■ Department Table Programming (Submode 3) ........................................................5-11
■ PLU Table Programming (Submode 4) ....................................................................5-17
■ Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5) ................................................................5-24
■ Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6) .................................................................5-25
■ Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)..........................................................................5-26
■ Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)..............................................5-27
■ Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/
Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12) .......................................................................5-28
■ Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13).....................................................5-29
■ Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14).....................................................5-30
■ Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15) .............................................................5-31
■ Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19) .........................................5-32
■ PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24) ......................................................5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOC 1
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
■ Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26) ....................................5-35
■ PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27) .......................................5-36
■ PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)......................................................5-38
■ RKP Message Programming (Submode 30) ...........................................................5-39
■ Display Message Programming (Submode 31) .......................................................5-40
■ Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)...........................................5-41
■ Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42) ..........................................................5-42
■ Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43) .....................................................5-43
■ Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)...........................5-47
■ Day Part Setting (Submode 46)................................................................................5-48
■ Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)....................................................................5-49
■ Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51) .....................................................5-50
■ Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)...................................................................5-52
■ Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53) ..............................................................5-53
■ PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60) .............................................5-55
■ Printer Table Setting (Submode 71) .........................................................................5-56
■ %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting ................................................................................5-58
■ Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2) ........................................5-59
■ Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting ................................................................5-61
■ Store/Register No. Setting ........................................................................................5-62
6. Verification of Programmed Data ..................................................................6-1
6.1
6.2
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display ...................................6-1
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard ...............................................6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION
1.1 Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION
1.1
Items Programmed to Require Manager Intervention
During daily sale entry operations, a cashier may call for Manager Interventions.
1) During operations, a cashier comes across an item that requires Manager Intervention. The cashier, already
informed of it, may immediately call for Manager Intervention. Or the cashier, without knowing of it, attempts
the operation, and an error results with the Error Message “MANAGER REQUIRED” displayed, clears the
error by the [C] key, and then calls for Manager Intervention.
2) The manager goes to the cashier counter with the MGR or MA key.
3) The cashier explains what kind of operation is attempted, and removes the REG key from the Mode Lock at
the “REG” position.
4) The manager inserts the MGR or MA key and turns it to the “MGR” position.
5) The cashier operates the required item.
6) The manager returns the MGR or MA key to the “REG” position and removes it .
7) The cashier sets the REG key to the “REG” position again and continues registering operations.
The following is the table of the keys and operations that are programmable with Manager Intervention. Fill in the
table by marking in the “Not Required” or “Required” column of each item.
KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE
KEY
Manager Intervention
Not required Required
Reference
[DISC]
As for the key status change, ask your TOSHIBA
TEC representative.
[RECALL]
[TIP PAID]
[CHARGE TIP]
[%] ([% 1] to [% 8])
[VOID]
[PO]
[MENU 1] to [MENU 5]
[PRICE 1] to [PRICE 5]
[EX]
[ALL VOID]
[NS]
[RTR]
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION
1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions
KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE (continued)
OPERATION
Manager Intervention
Not required Required
Reference
Credit Balance
(NOTE 1 below)
As for the status change, ask your TOSHIBA TEC
representative.
Negative-balance Sale
Finalization by Media
Keys (except [AT/TL])
(NOTE 2)
Negative PLU Entries
Media Transfer
Guest Check Transfer
Guest Check Merge
Guest Check Split
PLU Price Read
PLU Stock Read
NOTES:
1. The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DISC], [VOID] will result in over-
subtraction of the subtotal amount at the time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status
“Not required” is selected, over-subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the “REG” mode.
However, over-subtraction using the [DISC] or [VOID] key is prohibited regardless of the credit
balance option if a sales transaction has been entered with an order table No. entry.
2. The “Negative-balance Sale” may be caused by:
1. Credit Balance of which status “Allowed” is selected.
2. Amounts entered through the [VOID] key (without an order table No. entry).
3. Amounts entered through negative PLUs.
4. Other negative amounts.
1.2
Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions
Amount Limit Release
Amount Limits may be programmed on PLUs, Tender Media, [DISC]. These limits are programmed to check an
excessively high or low amount entry by cashier’s mistake at the earliest stage.
1) During sale entries by a cashier, an error occurs when a PLU item has been entered, or a key (one of the
media keys, the [DISC] key) has been depressed.
2) The cashier clears the error by the [C] key. The cashier confirms the amount and operates the item again.
3) If the same error occurs again, the cashier attempts to enter the amount using the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.
4) If the operation results in an error again, the Amount Limit cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key.
5) The cashier calls for Manager Intervention.
The procedure thereafter is the same as Steps 2) to 7) for the Items Programmed to Require Manager
Intervention on the preceding page.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. MANAGER INTERVENTION
1.2 Other Operations Requiring Manager Interventions
Reference:
For reading the high and low amount limits of each PLU:
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
Department Status Read
(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)
For setting the item above:
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION
Department Table Programming (Submode 3)
(Amount limit of each PLU is restricted by the amount limit of its linked department.)
For reading the common high and low amount limits of all the PLUs, and the high amount limit of each tender
media key:
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
Function Key Amount Limit Read
For setting the item above:
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys
(Submode 8)
For reading an amount limit of the [DISC] key:
Chapter 6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
Dollar Discount Amount Limit Read
For setting the item above:
Chapter 5. PROGRAMMING OPERATION
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key
(Submode 35)
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE
2.1 Pick Up Operation
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE
The following are operations possible only in the “MGR” position of the Mode Lock, which are performed by the
manager.
2.1
Pick Up Operation
This operation is used to collect money from a drawer, during the day, for banking purpose, etc.
CONDITION
OPERATION
[PO]
Any time outside a sale, in a Signed-ON condition.
Mode Lock: MGR
|Media Amount Collected| [MEDIA KEY]
([ST])
[AT/TL]
Max. 8 digits
NOTE 2
Drawer
opens.
Repeat until all the collected media amounts are recorded.
NOTES:
1. Each media key can be programmed with its in-drawer limit. On reaching this limit in sale entries
(on finalizing a sales transaction), the Error Message “DRAWER LIMIT” is displayed with an
alarm generated to notify a cashier that the Pick Up operation is needed.
2. Depress the media keys corresponding to the collected media ([AT/TL] for cash). The media
keys that can be operated here are those programmed to print their media-in-drawer amounts in
reports.
3. Depress [ST], if necessary, to obtain the subtotal amount of the medias so far collected.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
SERVER DROP
CASH
CPN
*
*
300.00
150.00
450.00
TOTAL
TOTAL
450.00
450.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
2.2
Enforced Sign-off of a Cashier (Code Entry Method)
If a cashier once signed ON, then signed OUT to take a break does not come back, no one can operate the
register. In this case, the manager can perform this operation to forcibly release the cashier signed-OUT
condition.
CONDITION
OPERATION
In a Signed-OUT condition
Mode Lock: MGR
|2-digit manager-assign code| [SERVER #]............................... Same as a normal sign-OFF
01 to 99
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE
2.3 Enforced Clock-out of an Employee
2.3
Enforced Clock-out of an Employee
If an employee who once clocked in forgets to perform the clock-out operation, the manager can perform this
operation.
CONDITION
OPERATION
[OUT]
In a Clock-IN and Signed-OFF condition
Mode Lock: MGR
|Employee No.|
[OUT]
1 to 9999
|Date| |Hour| |Minute|
0 to 23 0 to 59
[SERVER #]....................Same as a normal clock-OUT,
or
however the symbol “**” is
displayed at the right of an entered
clock-out time.
[ENTER]
If necessary
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)
Day-Month-Year
Year-Month-Day
2.4
PLU Menu Shift Entry
Up to five different menus can be programmed for each [PLU Preset-code Key] and you can select either of the
following two features.
2.4.1
Menu Shift Entry “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature
OPERATION
Mode Lock: MGR
(PLU entries)
[MENU 2]
to
PLU entry ....................... After the PLU Entry, the
menu mode automatically
[MENU 5]
returns to the 1st menu mode.
with the 1st menu
with shifted menu
Menu shift declaration
2.4.2
Menu Shift Entry “Keeping the shifted Menu Level” Feature
You can shift the PLU menu level to another in the following two cases.
•
•
Using the [MENU] key
The same key operation as “Effective only for One PLU Entry” Feature. However, the shifted menu level is
held until another [MENU] key is depressed.
Using the Hourly Range Designation
Hourly range to start shifting each menu level can be programmed. If programmed, the menu level will be
automatically shifted to another when the hourly range starts.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE
2.5 RKP Table Change
NOTE: A program option allows you to perform this
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
operation in the REG mode.
MENU3
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
2.5
RKP Table Change
This operation changes an RKP (remote kitchen printer) on which the data is outputted.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: MGR
■ RKP Designation
|RKP No.|
[RKP]
1 to 4
RKP of which No. is entered will be designated as the destination of the data output.
Example) If you operate 123 then [RKP], the RKPs of Nos. 1 to 3 will be designated.
If you operate 0 then [RKP], no RKPs will be designated.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
RKP1
RKP2
RKP3
RKP4
RKP
0.01
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
■ RKP Connection Table Change
[RKP] ........................ Each time you depress the [RKP] key, the RKP connection table is changed from 1 to
2, and vice versa.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
1
R
Terminal
ID No.
Port
No.
RKP Connection
Table No. (1 or 2)
1 1
1 2
0
0
0
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RKP1
RKP2
RKP3
RKP4
J
0
RKP
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE
3. OPERATIONS IN “ - ” MODE
When a cashier has entered some data in a guest order table buffer memory (started with an order table No.
entry and ended with the [TOTAL] key) and then all the entries must be cancelled, you can quickly delete them in
the - position of the Mode Lock instead of deleting items one by one using the[VOID] key. For a sale entered
without an order table No. entry, the - mode is available by doing the same operation in REG or MGR mode.
CONDITION Any time outside a sale
Turn the Mode Lock to the - position.
■ To delete sale items without an order table No. entry:
Enter the same items that were purchased in “REG” mode and the amount is subtracted from the memory.
Operator display in the REG or MGR mode
Operator display in the - mode
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
REG-
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
*
*
1
SUBTL
TAX
PLU000010
10.00T
REG-
1
SUBTL
TAX
*
*
10.00
0.80
10.80
PLU000010
10.00T
10.00
CASH
0.80
10.80
CASH
¾®
CASH
CASH
10.80
10.80
10.80
10.80
1
TOTAL
DISP3
1
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
■ To delete items ordered with an order table No. entry (Order Table No. Manual Entry):
|Order Table No.| [START CHECK] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.
■ To delete items ordered with an order table No. (Order Table No. Automatic Entry):
|Order Table No.| [RECALL] [ALL VOID] ............All the entry data of the table is deleted.
Operator display in the REG or MGR mode
Operator display in the - mode
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
REG-
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
*
*
TABLE NO
PLU000001
PLU000010
001
P1S1
1.00T
10.00T
TABLE NO
REG-
001
P1S1
1
1
*
*
1
1
PLU000001
PLU000010
1.00T
10.00
¾®
NEW BALANCE001
ALL VD
11.90
0.00
2
TOTAL
DISP3
11.90
DISP5
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
NOTE: You can cancel only an order table which has been temporarily finalized by the[TOTAL] key.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
This chapter describes the operation to take each report and its contents.
•
•
•
A read (X) report allows you to read the totals but not clear the memory. After issuing a read report, only a
header of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.
A reset (Z) report allows you to read the totals and, at the same time, clear all the resettable totals. After
issuing a reset report, all the data of its report is written into the electronic journal buffer memory.
A symbol “X” is printed at the top of a read report, while “Z” is printed on a reset report to indicate the type of
report.
•
•
A reset report counter is printed on each reset report only.
A daily report covers the data obtained during a certain period on that day until the corresponding reset report
is issued, while a periodic report covers the data obtained during a certain period defined by the store.
When you issue a read report, make sure that the receipt-issue status is in “ON”. If the receipt-issue OFF
message is displayed in the operator display, depress the [SERVER#/RECEIPT] key so that the message
disappears. As for a reset report, it can be issued even while the receipt-issue OFF message is displayed.
•
WARNING!
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.
4.1
How to Access a Report Item
Two ways are available to access a report item you want to issue; through the operator display and through the
keyboard.
4.1.1
How to Access a Report Item through the Operator Display
When you turn the mode selector key to the X or Z position, the initial screens shown below will appear.
X Mode
Z Mode
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
1
2
X
GTX
1
2
Z
GTZ
3 PROGRAM READ
4 E-JOURNAL
5 OTHERS
3 E-JOURNAL
4 OTHERS
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
TOTAL
COMB3
0.00
↓
TOTAL
COMB3
0.00
↓
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
■ Description of each Navigation Key (Initial screen in X or Z)
13
14
15
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
Display Item
Description
1 Navigation Key 1
2 Navigation Key 2
3 Navigation Key 3
4 Navigation Key 4
5 Navigation Key 5
COMB1
COMB2
COMB3
EJ
X Mode:
Z Mode:
Start key for the daily combination read report 1
Start key for the daily combination reset report 1
X Mode:
Z Mode:
Start key for the daily combination read report 2
Start key for the daily combination reset report 2
X Mode:
Z Mode:
Start key for the daily combination read report 3
Start key for the daily combination reset report 3
X Mode:
Z Mode:
Start key for the all electronic journal data read report
Start key for the all electronic journal data reset report
↓
Cursor key
Example) If you want to issue the daily all cashiers read report, operate as follows.
Select “1 X” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below
appears.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
X
*
*
0 COMBINATION
1 COMBINATION1
2 COMBINATION2
3 FINANCIAL
4 CLERK
6 CREDIT
8 GROUP
9 MEDIA ALL
10 HOURLY
11 DP
12 MEDIA
13 PLU
14 STOCK
15 CUSTOMER
24 PLU GROUP
25 DAY PART
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
In the X or Z mode, the navigation keys are changed as follows from the second screen or later.
Display Item
Description
1 Navigation Key 1
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
Requests the preceding report item screen.
2 Navigation Key 2
3 Navigation Key 3
4 Navigation Key 4
5 Navigation Key 5
Requests the next report item screen.
Decides a selected item.
Cursor Key
↓
Cursor key
To be Continued
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
Continued
Select “4 CLERK” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below
appears.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
X
*
*
1 ALL
2 INDIVIDUAL
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Select “1 ALL” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below
appears.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
X
CLERK
1 PRINT OUT
2 DISPLAY
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
If you want to print out the report, select “1 PRINT OUT”, then depress the [ENTER] key.
If you only want to verify the report on the display, select “2 DISPLAY”, then depress the [ENTER] key.
NOTES:
1. If you want to cancel a selected item already decided by the [ENTER] key and go back to the
preceding screen, depress the [ESC] key.
2. If you want to interrupt a report print-out or a report display already started by the final [ENTER]
key, depress the [ITEM CORR] or the [VOID] key.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
4.1.2
How to Access a Report Item through the Keyboard
You can directly access a report item you want to issue through a key operation on the keyboard.
■ Daily Reports
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
Sample
Page
FINANCIAL READ AND RESET
4-10
•
•
Financial Read
Financial Reset
X
Z
3 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)
CASHIER READ AND RESET
4-12
•
•
All Cashier Read
All Cashier Reset
X
Z
4 [ST] (Drawer opens.)
•
•
Individual Cashier Read
Individual Cashier Reset
X
Z
Code Entry Method:
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
Cashier Key Method:
Depress the required Cashier Key,
then 4 [AT/TL]
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ AND
RESET
4-12
•
•
Credit Card Company Sales Read
Credit Card Company Sales Reset
X
Z
6 [AT/TL]
DEPARTMENT GROUP READ
X
X
8 [AT/TL]
4-13
4-13
4-14
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER TOTAL READ
9 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)
HOURLY RANGE READ AND RESET
•
•
Hourly Read
Hourly Reset
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]
DEPARTMENT READ AND RESET
4-14
•
•
All department Read
All department Reset
X
Z
11 [AT/TL]
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-
DRAWER READ
X
12 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)
4-15
4-15
PLU READ AND RESET
*
•
Individual PLU Read
X
13 [#]
|PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])
Repeatable
[AT/TL]
* (May be replaced by
[PLU Preset-code Key])
•
•
Zone PLU Read
Zone PLU Reset
X
Z
13 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
PLU Code | PLU Code |
•
•
All PLU Read
All PLU Reset
X
Z
13 [AT/TL]
13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]
•
Inactive PLU Read
X
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
■ Daily Reports (Continued)
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
Sample
Page
PLU STOCK READ
4-17
•
Individual PLU Stock
X
X
14 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable
•
•
Zone PLU Stock
All PLU Stock
14 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
PLU Code | PLU Code |
X
X
14 [AT/TL]
CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET
4-17
•
Individual File Read
15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]
•
•
Zone File Read
Zone File Reset
X
Z
15 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
File Code |
File Code |
•
•
All File Read
All File Reset
X
Z
15 [AT/TL]
•
Inactive File Read
X
15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]
PLU GROUP SALES READ AND RESET
4-18
4-19
4-19
•
•
PLU Group Sales Read
PLU Group Sales Reset
X
Z
24 [AT/TL]
DAY PART READ AND RESET
•
•
Day Part Read
Day Part Reset
X
Z
25 [AT/TL]
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH SALES
READ AND RESET
•
•
All Cashier Read
All Cashier Reset
X
Z
30 [ST]
Code Entry Method:
•
•
Individual Cashier Read
Individual Cashier Reset
X
Z
30 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
NOTE: You can check opened order tables.
Cashier Key Method:
Depress the required Cashier Key,
then 30 [AT/TL]
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT
SALES READ
4-20
•
•
All Cashier
Individual Cashier
X
X
31 [ST]
Code Entry Method:
31 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
NOTE: You can check reserved order tables.
Cashier Key Method:
Depress the required Cashier Key,
then 31 [AT/TL]
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
■ Daily Reports (Continued)
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
Sample
Page
COMBO SALE READ AND RESET
4-20
•
Individual Combo Read
X
43 [#] |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) [AT/TL]
Repeatable
•
•
All Combo Read
All Combo Reset
X
Z
43 [ST]
•
•
All Combo Read (detail)
All Combo Reset (detail)
X
Z
43 [AT/TL]
HOURLY COMBO SALE READ AND RESET
4-21
4-22
•
•
Hourly Combo Sale Read
Hourly Combo Sale Reset
X
Z
44 [AT/TL]
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND
RESET
•
•
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset
X
Z
47 [AT/TL]
ELECTRONIC JOURNAL DATA READ AND
RESET
4-23
•
•
All Data Read
All Data Reset
X
Z
50 [AT/TL]
Either can be omitted.
•
Consecutive No./Date Read
X
50 [#] 2 [#] |Consecutive No.| [#] |Date| [AT/TL]
Max. 4 digits
Month-Day-Year
8 digits (NOTE below)
•
•
All Guest Check Read
Cashier/Date Read
X
X
50 [#] 3 [#] [AT/TL]
50 [#] 4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]
(2-digit
manager-
assign
Code)
Month-Day-Year
8 digits (NOTE below)
* omissible
•
Clock-in/Clock-out/Date Read
X
50 [#] 5 [#] (|Date|) [AT/TL]
Month-Day-Year
8 digits (NOTE below)
* omissible
•
•
Transmission History Read
X
X
50 [#] 6 [#] [AT/TL]
EJ Buffer Remaining Line Read
50 [#] 7 [#] [AT/TL] (Display only)
NOTE: A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.
•
•
•
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)
Day-Month-Year
Year-Month-Day
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
■ GT Reports -- to be taken on weekly or monthly basis --
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
Sample
Page
FINANCIAL GT READ AND RESET
4-24
•
•
Financial GT Read
Financial GT Reset
X
Z
203 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET
4-24
•
•
All Cashier GT Read
All Cashier GT Reset
X
Z
204 [ST] (Drawer opens.)
•
•
Individual Cashier GT Read
Individual Cashier GT Reset
X
Z
Code Entry Method:
204 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
Cashier Key Method:
Depress the required Cashier Key,
then 204 [AT/TL]
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES GT READ
AND RESET
4-24
•
•
Credit Card Company Sales GT Read
Credit Card Company Sales GT Reset
X
Z
206 [AT/TL]
DEPARTMENT GROUP GT READ
X
208 [AT/TL]
4-24
4-24
DEPARTMENT GT READ AND RESET
•
•
All Department GT Read
All Department GT Reset
X
Z
211 [AT/TL]
PLU GT READ AND RESET
*
4-24
•
Individual PLU GT Read
X
213 [#]
|PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])
Repeatable
[AT/TL]
* (May be replaced by
[PLU Preset-code Key])
•
•
Zone PLU GT Read
Zone PLU GT Reset
X
Z
213 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
PLU Code | PLU Code |
•
•
All PLU GT Read
All PLU GT Reset
X
Z
213 [AT/TL]
•
Inactive PLU GT Read
X
213 [#] 0 [AT/TL]
PLU GROUP SALES GT READ AND RESET
4-24
4-24
•
•
PLU Group Sales GT Read
PLU Group Sales GT Reset
X
Z
224 [AT/TL]
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ
AND RESET
•
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read
(weekly)
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset
(weekly)
X
Z
247 [AT/TL]
•
•
•
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Read
(periodic)
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out GT Reset
(periodic)
X
Z
248 [AT/TL]
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.1 How to Access a Report Item
4.2
Time Edit for Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
This operation is used to edit the recorded time of an employee clock-in/clock-out and total break hours.
CONDITION
OPERATION
An employee of which recorded time is edited must be “Clock OUT”. Furthermore if the
employee has a cashier code, “Sign OFF” is also necessary.
Mode Lock: Z (Allowed only through the operator display)
As described in section 4.1.1, select “47 EMPLOYEE”
from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the
[ENTER] key. The screen shown below appears.
Select “2 EDIT TIME” from the screen using the
cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The
screen shown below appears.
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
Z
EMPLOYEE
Z
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE COD
1 ALL
0
2 EDIT TIME
→
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Please input Employee code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Select an item you want to edit from the screen using
the cursor key, enter time, then depress the [ENTER]
key. In this case, the clock-out time is changed from
17:40 to 18:40. A symbol “**” is displayed at the
right of the edited time and “TOTAL HOURS” is
automatically recalculated.
Enter an employee code, then depress the [ENTER]
key. The screen shown below appears.
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04
Z/GTZ 02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
Z
EMPLOYEE
O001
CASHIER
IN
Z
EMPLOYEE
O001
CASHIER
IN
0001
01
0001
01
09:30
18:40
00:10
09:00
09:30
17:40
00:10
08:00
OUT
TOTAL BREAK
TOTAL HOURS
OUT
TOTAL BREAK
TOTAL HOURS
**
←
Please input data.
Please input data.
0.00
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
NOTE: You can designate and enter the date before the time entry, if necessary.
A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.
•
•
•
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)
Day-Month-Year
Year-Month-Day
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.3 Combination Reports
4.3
Combination Reports
You can issue a combination report which consists of a maximum of 5 reports selected from the list shown below,
and you can program your own 3 combination reports. As for the programming, refer to the next chapter
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS.
REPORT NAME
REPORT AVAILABLE
Financial Report
All Cashier Report
Credit Company Sales Report
Department Group Report
Media Sales and In-drawer Report
Hourly Range Report
All Department Report
All Media Sales & Cash-in-drawer Report
All PLU Report
All PLU Stock Report
All Guest File Report
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
GTX
GTX
GTX
GTX
GTZ
GTZ
GTZ
Z
Z
GTX
GTX
GTZ
GTZ
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
PLU Group Sales Report
Day Part Report
GTX
GTZ
Check Track with Sales Report (All Cashier)
Check Track without Sales Report (All Cashier)
All Combo Sale Report (detail)
Hourly Combo Sale Report
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (weekly)
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Report (periodic)
Z
Z
Z
GTX
GTX
GTZ
GTZ
KEY OPERATION: Mode Lock: X for Read
|
| [AT/TL]
Z for Reset
Enter the Report No.:
None (simply depress [AT/TL]): Daily Combination Report 1
200: GT Combination Report 1
1:
201: GT Combination Report 2
2: Daily Combination Report 3
202: GT Combination Report 3
Daily Combination Report 2
*
As for the daily combination reports 1 to 3, you can issue them by simply depressing the corresponding
navigation keys COMB1 to COMB3.
NOTES:
1. If a report in which the issue mode does not match the mode lock position to take a combination
report is contained in a combination report table, that report issuance will be skipped.
2. The all department report and the financial report are initially programmed to the combination
report 1 (daily and GT).
3. Whether the drawer opens or not depends on the reports contained in a combination report table.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.4 General Notes on Report Takings
4.4
General Notes on Report Takings
1. The cashier signed-OFF or signed-OUT condition is required for taking any X or Z reports in the Code Entry
Method. (Otherwise, an error will result when the Mode Lock is turned to the “X” or “Z” position.)
2. The [ITEM CORR] (or [VOID]) key may be depressed anytime during the printing of a report, for the purpose
of aborting the receipt issuance. When a report abort has been operated for a reset report, the memory of the
report data will not be cleared.
3. The drawer opens at the start of printing for those reports which are noted with “(Drawer opens)” in the Daily
and GT report table. However, a program option allows you to take the financial report while the drawer
remains closed.
4.5
Report Sample Format
Shown below are sample formats of the respective reports. In referring to those formats, please note the
following:
•
The data contents are merely examples to show a report format. The numeric data may not balance correctly.
4.5.1
Financial Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
Percent Discount 2 to 8
on Subtotal Operation
Count, Amount if any
Date, Day-of-Week, Register No.
Z03
GT
Z_FINANCIAL
Report Symbol, Report Name
Grand Total
Net GT
1177.40
1177.20
1177.40
0.13
990.94
37.35
61.80
4.56
NET GT
GS
%+
NS
Negative Other
Income
Department
Item Count,
Amount if any
161
1
150
Gross Sale Item Count, Amount
Percent Charge Operation Count, Amount
Net Sale without Tax Item Count, Amount
Tax 1 Amount
TAX1
TAX2
TAX5
Tax 2 Amount
Manual Tax Amount
Tax 3 & Tax 4 Amount if any
NS
150
1094.65
2.80
18.00
1.36
Net Sale with Tax Item Count, Amount
Charge Tip Operation Count, Amount
CHG TIP
HASH DP
%-
DISC
GRATUITY
TOTAL
OPEN TABLE
CASH
CHECK
Chg
MISC
CPN
1
1
Positive Other Income Department Item Count, Amount
Percent Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount
Dollar Discount on Subtotal Operation Count, Amount
Gratuity Operation Count, Amount
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount
Open Order Table (Unpaid Account) Customer Count, Amount
Cash Sales Customer Count, Amount
2
1
4
0.10
3.21
39CU
1117.20
184.06
481.31
60.00
242.59
15.00
1.00
117.45
30.00
5.00
6CU
25CU
0CU
7CU
0CU
0CU
2CU
2
Check Sales Customer Count, Amount
Charge Sales Customer Count, Amount
Misc. Media Sales Customer Count, Amount
Coupon Sales Customer Count, Amount
Charge Posting by Check Track Customer Count, Amount
Received-on-Account Operation Count, Amount
Paid Out Operation Count, Amount
CRT TL5
R/A
PO
1
See NOTE LOAN
on the next PICK UP
page.
171.37
5.00
Loan Amount
Pick Up Operation Count, Amount
if selected to print by
a program option
1
Credit 1 to Credit 4
Sales Customer
Count, Amount if any
-- To be continued --
Combo Sale Discount
Amount if the option “Combo
Sale” has been selected.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
-- Continued --
CASH ID
171.37
160.00
242.59
15.00
1.00
117.45
24.50
11.00
13.00
49.50
0.24
Cash-in-drawer Amount
CHECK ID
Chg ID
MISC ID
CPN ID
CRT ID5
TIP PAID
CORR
VOID
ALL VD
%-
4
7
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
Operation Count & In-drawer Amount for each non-cash media
Eat-in/Takeout Customer
Count, Amount if the
option “Eat-in/Takeout”
has been selected.
Tip Paid Operation Count, Amount
Item Correct Operation Count, Amount
Void Operation (for PLU item) Count, Amount
All Void Operation Count, Amount
Percent Discount on PLU item Operation Count, Amount
Negative Department Total Item Count, Amount
Negative Balance Sale Customer Count, Amount
Taxable Total 1 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 1 taxation)
Taxable Total 2 (Sale Amount subject to Tax 2 taxation)
Tax Exempted Customer Count
-DP TL
-SALE
TXBL1
1
3.00
See
NOTE
below
2CU
3.00
391.45
904.40
TXBL2
TAX EX
TAX1EX
GUEST
1CU
5.00
Sale Portion Exempted from Tax 1
Guest Total
41CU
CUR1
CUR2
ITEM/CUS
NS /CUS
NO SALE
TRAY CTR
3
3
315.96
115.00
Foreign Currency 1 Operation Count, Amount
Foreign Currency 2 Operation Count, Amount
Sales Item Count per Customer
3.85
Operation Count &
Amount for each
Foreign Currency 3
to 5 if any
25.41
Net Sale per Customer
No-sale Operation Count
Tray Total Operation Count
2
35
0001Z
Financial Reset Report Count
(printed on the reset report only) Sale Portions
Receipt Consecutive No., Time Exempted from
Tax 2 to 4 if any
0290 21:54TM
Taxable Total 3 & 4 if any
Selective Itemizer 1 & 2
Operation Count, Amount if any
NOTE: Print items surrounded by a dotted line are
printed on a daily report only but not on a
periodic report.
Negative Mode ( - )
Operation Count,
Amount if any
Negative Tax Amount if any
Percent Discount 2 to 8 on PLU item
Operation Count, Amount if any
Dollar Discount on PLU item
Operation Count, Amount if any
Misc. Void Operation (other than
PLU item) Count, Amount if any
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.2
Cashier Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X04
02
GS
X_CLERK
2CLDYER
50
Cashier Code and Cashier Name
354.90
269.00
9.40
16.64
4.56
299.60
2.80
0.10
302.30
84.40
91.10
114.31
5.00
NS
43
TAX1
TAX2
TAX5
NS
CHG TIP
DISC
TOTAL
OPEN TABLE
CASH
Chg
43
1
1
11CU
3CU
5CU
3CU
0CU
0CU
MISC
CPN
1.00
Same contents as the financial report except:
• Data of GT and Net GT is not printed.
• Data of Server Transfer and Tip Percentage, if any, is printed.
CASH ID
Chg ID
MISC ID
CPN ID
TIP PAID
ALL VD
-DP TL
-SALE
1.60
114.31
5.00
3
1
1
1
1
1.00
24.50
49.50
3.00
1
1CU
3.00
TXBL1
TXBL2
102.00
245.00
TAX EX
TAX1EX
GUEST
1CU
5.00
200.00
25.45
12CU
1
CUR1
ITEM/CUS
NS /CUS
TRAY CTR
3.91
8
0243 22:33TM
4.5.3
Credit Card Company Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_CREDIT
#3001
X06
01
02
03
CRT01
CRT02
CRT03
1
1
1
21.97
50.77
28.46
Company Code, Company Name, Operation Count, Amount
Total of Operation Count and Amount
TOTAL
3
101.20
0240 22:29TM
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.4
Department Group Read Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_GROUP
#3001
X08
GP
GP
GP
01
02
03
Minor Group 1
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount
93
50
1
42.01%
413.05
555.26
15.00
56.47%
1.53%
Total of Item Count and Amount
TOTAL
144
983.31
Major Group 1
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
01
02
03
04
05
44
49
34
16
1
6.81%
35.20%
36.94%
19.53%
1.53%
66.95
346.10
363.26
192.00
15.00
Total of Item Count and Amount
TOTAL
144
983.31
0239 22:29TM
4.5.5
Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X09
TOTAL
CASH
CHECK
Chg
MISC
X_MEDIA_ALL
38CU
23CU
0CU
7CU
0CU
0CU
2CU
1087.57
451.68
60.00
242.59
15.00
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount
Each Media Sale Customer Count, Amount
CPN
1.00
CRT TL5
CASH ID
CHECK ID
Chg ID
MISC ID
CPN ID
CRT ID5
CUR1
117.45
141.74
160.00
242.59
15.00
4
7
3
1
2
3
3
Each Media-in-drawer Operation Count, Amount
(operation count for cash is not printed)
1.00
117.45
315.96
115.00
Each Foreign Currency-in-drawer
Operation Count, Amount
CUR2
0226 22:18TM
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.6
Hourly Range Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_HOURLY
10:00TM
#3001
X10
Hourly Range 10:01 to 12:00
Item Count, Customer Count, Amount
Hourly Range 12:01 to 14:00
8
3CU
6CU
11CU
4CU
1CU
8CU
5CU
63.64
12:00TM
24
160.53
326.54
174.64
32.76
14:00TM
Hourly Range 14:01 to 16:00
Hourly Range 16:01 to 18:00
Hourly Range 18:01 to 20:00
Hourly Range 20:01 to 22:00
Hourly Range 22:01 and thereafter
44
16:00TM
19
18:00TM
5
20:00TM
24
143.03
167.09
22:00TM
19
0238 22:28TM
4.5.7
Department Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_DP_ALL
#3001
X11
DP
DP
DP
DP
DP
01
Department 1
Item Count, Sales Percentage (NOTE below), Amount
Dollar Discount or %- Operation Count, Amount (Optional Print)
28
16
19
30
17
2.86%
27.65
0.00
DISC
02
0
4.06%
0
39.30
0.00
DISC
03
9.69%
0
93.80
0.00
DISC
04
26.06%
0
252.30
0.00
DISC
05
20.94%
1
202.76
0.24
DISC
TOTAL
-TOTAL
143
1
968.31
-3.00
Total of Positive Departments Item Count, Amount
Total of Negative Departments Item Count, Amount
0237 22:27TM
NOTE: A program option allows you to print “Customer Count” instead of “Sales Percentage”.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.8
All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-Drawer Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_MEDIA
#3001
X12
TOTAL
38CU
1087.57
141.74
All Media Sales Customer Count, Amount
Cash-in-drawer Amount
CASH ID
0227 22:19TM
4.5.9
PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
■ Individual PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_PLU_INDIV
#3001
X13
000001 PLU000001
PLU Code 1, PLU Name
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
TL
27
0
1
0
0
27.00
0.00
0.65
0.00
0.00
Price Levels 1 ~ 5 Item Count, Amount
Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5
PLU Code 2 Data
28
27.65
000002 PLU000002
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
TL
15
0
1
0
0
37.50
0.00
1.80
0.00
0.00
39.30
16
Total Data of PLU Code 1 and PLU Code 2
TOTAL
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
TL
42
0
2
0
0
64.50
0.00
2.45
0.00
0.00
66.95
44
0230 22:22TM
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
■ All PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_PLU_ALL
#3001
X13
000001 PLU000001
PLU Code 1, PLU Name
Price Level 1 Item Count, Amount
P1
P3
TL
27
1
28
27.00
0.65
27.65
Total Item Count, Amount of Price Levels 1 to 5
PLU Code 2 Data
000002 PLU000002
P1
P3
TL
15
1
16
37.50
1.80
39.30
PLU Code 3 Data
PLU Code 4 Data
000003 PLU000003
P1
P3
TL
18
1
19
90.00
3.80
93.80
000004 PLU000004
P1
P2
P3
TL
27
2
1
229.50
15.60
7.20
30
252.30
PLU Code 5 Data
000005 PLU000005
P1
P2
TL
16
1
17
192.00
11.00
203.00
TOTAL
P1
P2
P3
135
4
4
920.00
35.10
13.45
968.55
Total of Positive PLUs Item Count, Amount
Total of Negative PLUs Item Count, Amount
TL
143
-TOTAL
P1
1
1
-3.00
-3.00
TL
0232 22:24TM
NOTE: All PLU Report can be programmed to not print items and price levels having zero totals.
■ Zone PLU Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
The format is the same as “All PLU Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read
or Reset Report outputs the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.
X13
X_PLU_ZONE
000001-000005
■ Inactive PLU Read Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_PLU_ZERO
#3001
X13
000015 PLU000015
PLU Code, PLU Name
0233 22:25TM
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.10 PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)
■ Individual PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_STOCK_INDI
#3001
348
X14
000007 PLU000007
PLU Code 7, PLU Name
Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity
0
0234 22:25TM
■ All PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_STOCK_ALL
#3001
X14
000004 PLU000004
PLU Code 4, PLU Name
0
0
0
0
0
520
133
433
348
176
Minimum Stock Quantity, Current Stock Quantity
000005 PLU000005
000006 PLU000006
000007 PLU000007
000008 PLU000008
0236 22:27TM
■ Zone PLU Stock Read Report (Daily)
The format is the same as “All PLU Stock Read Report” above. The only difference is that the Zone Read
Report outputs the stock data of the PLUs in the zone designated by the key operation to take the report.
X14
X_STOCK_ZONE
000004-000007
Zone designation
4.5.11 Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)
■ Individual Customer File Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_CUST_INDIV
#3001
X15
#000000000001 RENO
Customer File Code 1, Customer Name
Operation Count, Balance
1
54.70
0247 22:36TM
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
■ All Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_CUST_ALL
#3001
X15
#000000000001 RENO
Customer File Code 1, Customer Name
Operation Count, Balance
Customer File Code 2 Data
1
1
54.70
62.75
#000000000002 SMITH
0246 22:35TM
■ Zone Customer File Read or Reset Report (Daily)
The format is the same as “All Customer File Read or Reset Report” above. The only difference is that the
Zone Read or Reset Report outputs the data of the customer files in the zone designated by the key operation
to take the report.
X15
X_CUST_ZONE
000000000001_000000000010
■ Inactive Customer File Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_CUST_ZERO
#3001
X15
#000000000003 BECKHAM
Customer File Code, Customer Name
#000000000004 JOHNSON
#000000000005 SHEARER
0249 22:37TM
4.5.12 PLU Group Read or Reset Report (Daily or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
X_PLU_GROUP
#3001
X24
PLU GP01
PLU GP02
PLU GP03
PLU GP04
PLU GP05
PLU Group 1
Item Count, Sales Percentage, Amount
44
49
34
16
1
6.81%
35.19%
36.96%
19.52%
1.53%
66.95
346.10
363.50
192.00
15.00
TOTAL
144
983.55
Total of Item Count and Amount
0250 22:37TM
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.13 Day Part Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X25
X_DAY_PART
10:00TM
Hourly Range 10:01 to 14:00
Major Group 1
Item Count, Amount
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
01
02
03
04
05
11
13
4
15.50
93.00
45.50
52.00
15.00
4
1
14:00TM
Hourly Range 14:01 to 18:00
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
01
02
03
04
16
20
19
8
20.95
145.10
196.00
92.00
18:00TM
Hourly Range 18:01 and thereafter
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
01
02
03
04
17
16
11
4
30.50
108.00
121.76
48.00
0251 22:37TM
4.5.14 Check Track (Guest Order Table) with Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)
■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X30
02
X_CT_W_INDI
2CLDYER
#018
Cashier Code, Cashier Name
Order Table No., Amount remaining unpaid
43.40
#021
#025
32.50
8.50
TOTAL
3
84.40
0253 22:38TM
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.15 Check Track (Guest Order Table) without Sales Read Report (Daily)
■ Individual Cashier Read Report Sample
11-29-1999 MON
X_CT_WO_INDI
#3001
#011
X31
02
Cashier Code, Cashier Name
Reserved Order Table
2CLDYER
#003
#015
#004
#005
Total of reserved Order Table
TOTAL
5
0256 22:40TM
4.5.16 Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)
Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected.
■ Combo Sales Total Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_COMBO_SUM
#3001
X43
COMBO TOTAL
Combo Sales Total
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount
1235.12
423.89
100
0121 20:30TM
■ Combo Sales Detail Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_COMBO_ALL
#3001
X43
01
COMBO1
98.56
Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount
9
5
21.20
153.41
43.00
02
COMBO2
COMBO TOTAL
1235.12
423.89
Combo Sales Total
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount
100
0122 20:30TM
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
■ Individual Combo Sale Read Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_COMBO_INDI
#3001
X43
01
COMBO1
98.56
21.20
Combo Code, Combo Name, Combo Sales Amount
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount
9
COMBO TOTAL
98.56
21.20
Combo Sales Total
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount
9
0123 20:30TM
4.5.17 Hourly Range Combo Sales Read or Reset Report (Daily)
Available only when the feature “Combo Sales” has been selected and also a combo sale table has been linked
to each hourly range.
11-29-1999 MON
X_COMBO_PERI
10:00TM
#3001
X44
Hourly Range 10:01 to 11:00
Combo Sales Amount
COMBO TOTAL
96.24
9
9
41.12
Operation Count, Combo Discount Amount
11:00TM
COMBO TOTAL
100.62
48.28
COMBO TOTAL
324.28
198.22
Combo Sales Total
Total of Operation Count and Combo Discount Amount
56
0124 20:31TM
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.18 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read or Reset Report (Daily, Weekly or Periodic)
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X47
0001
X_EMPLOYEE
JONES
CASHIER
Employee Code, Employee Name
Job Code, Job Name
01
CLOCK IN
09:30
22:30
04:09
08:51
Job Start Time
Job End Time
Break Hours Total on each Job
Working Hours Total on each Job
CLOCK OUT
TOTAL BREAK
TOTAL HOURS
12************************************************
01
CASHIER
REGULAR HOUR
O/T HOURS
08:00
00:51
12************************************************
Regular Working Hours on each Job
Overtime Hours on each Job
TOTAL
REGULAR HOUR
O/T HOURS
08:00
00:51
Regular Working Hours Total
Overtime Hours Total
0005
03
FELDER
COOK
CLOCK IN
CLOCK OUT
TOTAL BREAK
TOTAL HOURS
09:33
22:12
00:00
12:39
12************************************************
03
COOK
REGULAR HOUR
O/T HOURS
12************************************************
08:00
04:39
TOTAL
REGULAR HOUR
O/T HOURS
08:00
04:39
0251 22:37TM
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.5 Report Sample Format
4.5.19 Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)
■ All Electronic Journal Read or Reset Report (Daily)
11-29-1999 MON
X_EJ_ALL
#3001
#3001
X50
11-29-1999 MON
***CLOCK IN
***
**
1
**
0001
1 09:30
0066 09:30TM
11-29-1999 MON
***CLOCK IN
#3001
***
**
2
**
0002
1 09:31
0067 09:31TM
11-29-1999 MON
***CLOCK IN
#3001
***
**
3
**
0003
1 09:31
0068 09:31TM
11-29-1999 MON
All the data stored in the electronic journal buffer memory is printed.
#3001
X47
X_EMPLOYEE
0261 22:44TM
11-29-1999 MON
#3001
X248
GTX_EMPLOYEE
0262 22:45TM
0263 22:45TM
■ Electronic Journal (Consecutive No./Date) Read Report (Daily)
X50
X_EJ_CONSNO
Data corresponding to the designated consecutive No./date is printed.
■ Electronic Journal (All Guest Check) Read Report (Daily)
X50
X_EJ_INVOICE
Data of all the guest checks is printed.
■ Electronic Journal (Cashier/Date) Read Report (Daily)
X50
X_EJ_CLERK
Data corresponding to the designated cashier/date is printed.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS
4.6 GT REPORTS
■ Electronic Journal (Clock-in & Clock-out/Date) Read Report (Daily)
X50
X_EJ_EMPLOYE
Data regarding the employee clock-in/clock-out is printed.
■ Electronic Journal (Transmission History) Read Report (Daily)
X50
X_EJ_HISTORY
Data of the transmission history is printed.
4.6
GT Reports
The print form and items of a GT report are the same as those of its corresponding daily report, except the report
header portion. Please also note that some items provided in the daily report are not provided in its GT reports.
The counters and totals in a GT report are records accumulated for a certain period (week, month, etc.) while
those counters and totals in the daily report are usually records for a day. The accumulated record data in each
GT report will be reset when its GTZ report has been taken.
Header Example
X11
X_DP_ALL
X211
GTX_DP_ALL
→
Department Read Report (Daily)
Department GT Read Report
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.1 Before you enter the SET Mode
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
This chapter is provided for the store programmer or the store manager who may have to change the programmed
data of the FS-2600 series ECR on the daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Usually, all the basic program data required
foryourstoreshouldhavealreadybeensetbeforedeliveryoftheproductbyyourlocalTOSHIBATECrepresentative.
However, if it becomes necessary to change or add program data, please refer to this chapter. It is also recommended
that you read the OPERATOR’S GUIDE as well as other chapters of the MANAGER’S GUIDE in order to thoroughly
understand the descriptions in this chapter. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here that
must be changed or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative.
WARNING!
Never try to access a program item other than those shown in this chapter. If you access it
and mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.
5.1
Before you enter the SET Mode
Please note that you should use the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet or the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet that is proper
for each program item. The SET Mode Keyboard Sheet is printed on the reverse side of the REG Mode
Keyboard Sheet. Refer to the following list.
5.1.1
Program items that require the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PLU Stock Loading and Changing (Submode 24)
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting (Submode 27)
PLU Preset Price Setting and Changing (Submode 60)
%+ and %- Rate Setting
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting
Store/Register No. Setting
5.1.2
Program items that require the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)
Cashier Programming (Submode 2)
Department Table Programming (Submode 3)
PLU Table Setting (Submode 4)
Time Setting and Adjustment (Submode 5)
Date Setting and Adjustment (Submode 6)
Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests (Submode 8)
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)
Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)
Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)
Guest File Table Setting (Submode 15)
Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming (Submode 26)
PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)
RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)
Display Message Programming (Submode 31)
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)
Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)
Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.2 Character Entries
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day Part Setting (Submode 46)
Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)
Job Code/Working Hour Setting (Submode 51)
Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)
Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)
Printer Setting (Submode 71)
5.2
Character Entries
Two ways are available to enter characters for the various names and messages; character code entry method
and direct character entry method.
CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method
This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key.
DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method
This method is to set a character by directly depressing a character key which has been printed on the SET
mode keyboard sheet.
5.2.1
Character Code Entry Method
■ Character Code Table
Column Code
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
6
7
p
q
r
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Row
Code
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
\
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
II
III
II
#
$
%
&
s
t
,
1/2
1/4
★
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
D
C
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
kg
lb
¢
£
*
+
,
J
j
No
x
;
K
L
[
k
l
<
=
>
?
|
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
_
~
/
|
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.2 Character Entries
NOTE: Characters corresponding to the following codes can be used only for display but not for print.
715, 1206, 1207, 1214, 1215, 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304, 1500, 1501, 1502, 1503, 1506, 1507, 1508,
1509, 1510, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1515, 1305 (applicable to the TM-300 only)
■ How to Set a Character
•
To set a regular-sized character, enter a column code and then a row code, followed by the [#] key.
ex.) To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#].
To set “kg”, enter 1508, and depress [#].
•
•
To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior code entry, or enter 200 and depress [#].
Depress the [X] key once prior to a regular-sized character entry, and it will be a double-sized character (a
blank will also be double-sized) .
ex.) To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized:
[X] 407 [#] 502 [#]
415 [#]
505 [#]
500 [#]
G
R
O
U
P
•
Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or entered name
with all double-sized characters.
ex.) To set “GROUP” all in double-sized:
[X] [X]
407 [#]
502 [#]
415 [#]
505 [#]
500 [#]
G
R
O
U
P
All Double-sized Declaration
5.2.2
Direct Character Entry Method
■ SET Mode Keyboard Sheet
Detach the keyboard sheet frame from the register, then turn over the REG Mode Keyboard Sheet so that the
SET Mode Keyboard Sheet printed on the reverse side can be used.
1
2
W
S
3
E
4
R
F
C
%
:
5
T
G
V
&
+
6
Y
H
B
7
U
J
N
(
8
I
9
0
P
S
.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SHIFT
Q
O
CAPS
LOCK
SMALL
LOCK
A
D
K
M
)
L
D
X
$
F
ST
%
SPACE
Z
X
,
!
!
-
#
$
#
=
@
1/4
/
*
8
8
ESC
Enter NEXT
C
1/2
4
5
6
Pg
Up
ALL ITEM OPEN Pg
VOID CORR
Dw
£
7
7
7
7
7
7
¢
8
8
8
8
8
8
#
4
C
Ü
8
NS
4
4
1
4
4
1
5
5
2
5
5
2
0 0
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
4
1
0
5
9
6
3
X
5
3
1
2
0 0
6
PLU
4
00
ST
4
3
DP# 2
AT/TL4
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.3 Condition Required for Programming Operations
■ Functions of Keys
[DOUBLE]
Used to enter all the characters of one line in double-size. Depress this key before all
character entries.
[DOUBLE SHIFT]
Depress this key prior to a character entry, and it will be a double-sized character. The
double-size modification using this key is effective for only one character to follow.
[CAPS LOCK]
[SMALL LOCK]
[SPACE]
Used to enter the capital-letter mode, which is held until [SMALL LOCK] is depressed.
Used to enter the small-letter mode, which is held until the [CAPS LOCK] is depressed.
Depress this key to enter a blank instead of a character.
[←] or [ITEM CORR]
Depressing this key once deletes one character just entered. Subsequent depressions
of the key will further delete the characters in the backward direction.
[ESC]
Used to cancel all the characters of one line just entered before the [Enter] key
depression.
Character Keys
Simply depress each key corresponding to the required character. Number Keys [1] to
[0] located on the top line of the keyboard merely function as character keys (i.e
entered numbers are part of print descriptors but not numeric value of Program No.,
Address No., Item Code, etc.).
Numeric Keys [ . ], [00], [0] to [9] (located near the bottom right of the keyboard)
These keys are used to enter codes (Program No., Address No., etc. ) . These key entries will
not be part of descriptors.
NOTE: You can enter a character not shown on the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet by the character code entry
method.
5.3
Condition Required for Programming Operations
At the top of each programming operation a “CONDITION” is given. Unless the register satisfies this condition,
the programming operations will not be allowed.
There are two types of conditions:
“Any time outside a sale”
It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any other sale
entry.
“After ...Reset”
It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation. And an
error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words “After ... Reset” do
not necessarily mean “immediately after ...”.
When the designated reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in the
SET, X, or Z mode, the condition “After ... Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation is still
allowed.
On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating to that
report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or - mode, the programming operation will no longer be
allowed and the same reset report must be taken.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Thus the condition “After ... Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must be zero
(except non-resettable memory data). Because of this “CONDITION” requirement, the report data will be
protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting of the report to another
resetting of the same report next time.
5.4
How to Access a Program Item
Same as in the X or Z mode, two ways are available to access a program item; through the operator display and
through the keyboard.
5.4.1
How to Access a Program Item through the Operator Display
When you turn the mode selector key to the SET position, the initial screens shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
0.00
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
■ Description of each Navigation Key
13
14
15
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
••••*••••
10
••••*••••
20••••*••••
30••••*••••
40
Display Item
Description
1 Navigation Key 1
Pg up
Requests the preceding program menu screen.
Requests the next program menu screen.
2 Navigation Key 2
Pg dw
Enter
3 Navigation Key 3
Decides a selected item. Also decides an entered numeric value or
character.
4 Navigation Key 4
↑
↓
Cursor Key
Cursor key
5 Navigation Key 5
Example) If you want to perform the time setting or adjustment (submode 5), operate as follows.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Select “1 PROGRAMMING” from the initial screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The
program menu screen shown below appears.
SET
PROGRAMMING
0 MISC
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
8 AMOUNT LIMIT
9 FINANCIAL
1 STORE NAME
2 CASHIER
3 DEPARTMENT
4 PLU
5 TIME
6 DATE
10 PRINT L NAME
11 SYSTEM OP1
12 CA TAX & TIP
13 MINOR GROUP
14 MAJOR
7 HOURLY
15 CUSTOMER
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Select “5 TIME” from the screen using the cursor key, then depress the [ENTER] key. The screen shown below
appears.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME
01 TIME
12:34
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Enter a time value you want to set according to the guidance message “Please input data”. (In this case, 1530 for
15:30)
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME
01 TIME
12:34
Please input data.
15.30
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Depress the [AT/TL] key to finalize the setting and the screen automatically returns to the program menu screen.
NOTES:
1. Use the [ESC] key to return to the program menu screen after finalizing a program item “0
MISC”. Using the [AT/TL] key in this case causes an error.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
2. When you obtain an open-price PLU in the PLU Table Setting (Submode 4), depress the [OPEN]
key before the [Enter] key depression in a step to input a PLU price.
3. If a journal printer is connected to the register, data you have just programmed will be printed on
it. No print occurs on a receipt printer, however its data will be stored in the electronic journal
buffer memory.
5.4.2
How to Access a Program Item through the Keyboard
You can directly access a program item you want to perform through a key operation on the keyboard.
■ Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message Programming (Submode 1)
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 1 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING STORE NAME
1 STORE
↓
2 STORE
3 STORE
4 STORE
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Repeat for another line.
1 [X]
|Line No.| [ST]
(For sequentially programming
lines, the line number
specification can be skipped.)
1 to 4: Store Name/Message
(for Receipt/Receipt Guest Check)
5 to 7: Commercial Message (for Receipt)
8 to 9: Footer Logo Message (for Receipt)
Character Entries
[ST]
[AT/TL]
max. 40 characters/line
(See 5.2 Character
Entries.)
To complete
this line
To complete the
programming and
return to the program
menu screen.
NOTES:
1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be
entered. A combination of both types is also available.
2. When you fill one print line with all blanks, the line will be one line space.
3. If no commercial message is required on a receipt, fill the three print lines assigned to the
commercial message with all blanks. As a result, no extra lines will be fed.
4. As for the four print lines assigned to the store name/message, if you fill the area with all blanks,
it will be four lines space.
5. If your printer is the BRST-10 or the TM-T88, you can make and print your own logo on the store
name/message area.
6. When the program option “Footer Logo Message Print” is selected, a maximum of a 2-line footer
logo message can be programmed and it will be additionally printed on a receipt issued for a
sales transaction without an order table No. entry.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To program the following draft on the first line of the store name/message area.
R E S T A U R A N T
T E C
1 3 4 3
P E A C H
D R I V E
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 1, depress [X].
1 [ST] RESTAURANT [DOUBLE] [SPACE] TEC [DOUBLE] [SPACE]
1343 [SPACE] PEACH [SPACE] DRIVE [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P01
#01
RESTAURANT
STORE NAME
TEC1343 PEACH DRIVE
0409 10:29TM
■ Cashier Programming (Submode 2)
•
Programming
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 2 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING CASHIER
Please input cashier code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
2 [X]
|Cashier Code| [NS]
(NOTE 1 below)
For Address 1: Cashier Name
1 [ST]
Character Entries
[ST]
(max. 12 characters)
For Address 2: Cashier Status
2 [ST]
|Cashier Status| [#]
Repeat for
another
0: Cashier for Sale Entries
1: Cashier for Training Entries
cashier.
2: Cashier for All Guest Order Tables
accessible (NOTE 2 below)
3: -- vacant --
4: -- vacant --
5: Server (NOTE 3 below)
For Address 3: Tip Rate
3 [ST]
|Tip Rate| [#]
0 to 99.99 (%)
(Use the [ . ] key if a decimal
portion is contained in the rate.)
(NOTE 4 below)
For sequentially programming the
address, the Address number
specification can be skipped.
[AT/TL]
NOTES:
1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered. (The capacity is determined by
the RAM Allocation Setting. ) However, the actual maximum number of the cashiers are
preprogrammed. Therefore, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative for further information.
Standard Memory
1 to 15
Expansion Memory
Code Entry Type
1 to 99
---
[CLK] Key Type
1 to 8
2. Cashier status 2 (Cashier for All Guest Order Tables accessible) is effective only when the
program option “Cashier Exclusive” is selected.
3. A cashier whose status is “server” can only take an order from a guest, but not finalize a sales
transaction.
4. The following shows the way to calculate the tip amount:
Tip Amount = (Net Sale Without Tax) x (Tip Rate)
5. For a name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters can be
entered. A combination of both types is also available.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To program the following to a cashier code 1.
Cashier Code 1:
Name:
Status:
Tip Rate:
JONES
5 (Server)
3%
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 2, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST]
(2 [ST]) 5 [#] (3 [ST]) 3 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P02
01
CASHIER
01
#01
#02
#03
00004
1CLJONES
5
3%
0415 11:25TM
•
Deletion
CONDITION
After the Daily and GT Cashier Reset, (A cashier whose code is deleted must be in “Sign
OFF” for the code entry type. Furthermore, if the program option “Employee Management
System adopted” has been selected, the “Clock OUT” status of that cashier is necessary.)
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted.
2 [X]
[ITEM CORR]
|Cashier Code| [NS]
[AT/TL]
NOTES:
1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier is cleared.
2. A cashier whose code has been deleted by this operation cannot perform a sign-ON nor a sales
transaction.
ex.) To delete the cashier code 1 “JONES”.
Journal Print
P02
01
CASHIER
1CLJONES
----------------------------------------
00003
0417 11:54TM
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Department Table Programming (Submode 3)
•
Programming
CONDITION
To change the Positive/Negative
Status:
When you enter 3 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
After Department Daily & GT
and PLU Daily & GT Reset
To change any other programmed
data or to program new departments:
Any time outside a sale
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING DEPARTMENT
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
DP
DP
DP
DP
DP
DP
DP
DP
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
Please input Department code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
As for details of each Address,
refer to the following pages.
(NOTE 2 on the next page.)
Barcode Scanning
3 [X]
|Address Nos| [#]
|Department Code|
[DP#]
(NOTE 1 on the next page.)
for sequential-coded Dept. only
Submode No.
Address 1: Link Group
|Major GP| |Minor GP| [#]
(01 to 10) (01 to 30)
1 [ST]
Address 2: Department Name
Character Entries [ST]
max. 16 characters
2 [ST]
Operation
procedure
surrounded
by this line
is the same
as the
operation in
Submode 4.
Address 3: Status 1
|Status Code to ON| [#]
3 [ST]
Address 4: Status 2
Repeat for any
|Status Code to ON| [#]
address within
the same dept.
by re-entry for
correction.
4 [ST]
Address 5: Tax Status
|Tax Code| [#]
(NOTE 2)
5 [ST]
Address 6: High Amount Limit
Repeat for
other
departments.
|High Amount to be locked out| [#]
6 [ST]
(max. 7 digits)
Address 7: Low Amount Limit
|Low Amount to be locked out| [#]
7 [ST]
(max. 7 digits)
Address 8: Takeout Tax Status
|Takeout Tax Code| [#]
8 [ST]
[ST]
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)
Executes DLL.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
NOTES:
1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “3 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,
the designated Address (es) will be automatically accessed after the department designation. For
example, if you enter |0204| [#] here (designate each address by entering a two-digit code; 01
for Address 1, 02 for Address 2, you will then enter:
Dept Code + [DP#] key,
Character Entries [ST] (“2 [ST]” can be skipped), then
Status Code for Status 2 Selection [#] (“4 [ST]” can be skipped), then you
may go on to another department setting for the same address designations.
But still in this case, you can go to other addresses by first entering the Address No. and
depressing [ST]. The Address Designation feature may be useful when you want to program or
change contents of only one or two specific Addresses of multiple departments. (For example,
when you want to change only the names, but not any other programmed contents, of 15
departments.)
2. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation
feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.
3. The programming contents of each address are further described in the DEPARTMENT TABLE
PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below.
DEPARTMENT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
1
Linked Group Code
Enter a 4-digit code, composed of a 2-digit Major Group Code and 2-digit Minor Group Code.
| | | [#]
|
Minor Group Code 01 to 30
Major Group Code 01 to 10
ex.) To link Major Group No. 1 and Minor Group No. 1:
Enter: (0)
1
0
1
Major Group
Code
Minor Group
Code
Enter 00 when the department is not linked to
any Minor Gruop.
Enter 0 (or 00) when the department is not linked to any Major
Group.
NOTE: The “Major Group” and “Minor Group” here are merely names for those two grouping
total memories. In the memory process, those two totals are independent from the
other and no logical check is made for a combination of the Major and Minor group
codes to be linked to each department. In other words, you may regard them as “A”
grouping and “B” grouping. See the examples on the next page:
-- Continued on next page --
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
Major-Minor Grouping Method Example:
(In this case, you should check the logical linkage between the Major Groups and Minor
Groups.)
Major GP 01
Major GP 02
Minor
GP01
Minor
GP02
Minor
GP03
Minor
GP04
Minor
GP05
DP01
0101
DP02
0101
DP04
0102
DP06
0103
DP07
0103
DP10
0204
DP11
0204
DP14
0205
DP16
0205
Linked Group Code in setting
“A” Grouping and “B” Grouping Method Example:
(In this case, you may think that each department data are processed into max. 2 different
types of groupings.)
A-GP
01
A-GP
02
A-GP
03
B-GP
01
B-GP
02
B-GP
03
DP01
0100
DP02
0100
DP04
0201
DP06
0301
DP07
0300
DP10
0302
DP11
0002
DP14
0003
DP16
0003
DP17
0002
Linked Group Code in setting
Department Name
2
Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2
Character Entries. End with [ST].
When no name is programmed for a department, the following will be the auto-program name
(initial setting) for printing:
D P
xx
Department Code 01 to 99
double-sized characters
-- Continued on next page --
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
3
Status 1 Selection
•
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 3 of which status must be set to ON. More than one
code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.
Status
Item
Selective Status
Code
OFF
ON
1
2
3
Receipt Type
Single
Ordinary
Positive
Double
Ordinary or Other Income Dept.
Positive or Negative Dept.
Other Income
Negative
NOTE: The selection of Status Code 1 (Receipt Print Type) is effective only when the
program option “Receipt Single/Double Print” has been selected.
Setting Examples:
To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]
To set Statuses 1, 2 to ON................ Enter 12 [#]
To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]
4
Status 2 Selection
•
Enter Status Codes 5 to 8 of which status must be set to ON. More than one
code may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.
Status
Item
Selective Status
Code
OFF
ON
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5
6
7
8
Output to RKP-1?
Output to RKP-2?
Output to RKP-3?
Output to RKP-4?
No
No
No
No
5
Tax Status
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.
| [#]
•
|
|
|
|
Tax Status
0: Non-taxable
1: Tax 1
2: Tax 2
3: Tax 3
4: Tax 4
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)
-- Continued on next page --
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
6
7
8
High Amount Limit
Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the high amount to be locked out.
ex.) To prohibit any amount equal to or larger than $40.00:
4000 [#]
(Allows any amount equal to or smaller than $39.99.)
NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.
2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not
in MGR or - mode.
3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.
If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.
ex.) Entering 4001 to 4999 will all result in setting 4000.
Low Amount Limit
Enter a maximum of 7 digits to be set as the low amount limit.
ex.) To allow any amount equal to or larger than $4.00:
400 [#]
(Allows any amount equal to or larger than $4.00.)
NOTES: 1. To cancel the preset limit (i.e. to allow any amount), enter 0.
2. The limit amount set here will be applied to entries in REG mode only, but not
in MGR or - mode.
3. Zeros must be entered as all the digits other than the highest digit.
If any other value is entered, it will be regarded as a zero.
ex.) Entering 401 to 499 will all result in setting 400.
Takeout Tax Status Setting
This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”
has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in
Address 5 is applied.)
•
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.
| [#]
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable
1: Tax 1
2: Tax 2
3: Tax 3
4: Tax 4
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
NOTE: You can use a maximum of 99 departments. The memories of the departments 1 to 30 have already
been opened before delivery of the register.
If you want to open a memory and use a department other than the departments 1 to 30, enter a
department code you want to designate, then depress the [DP#] key in the key sequence of the
Department Table Programming. The memory of the department will be opened automatically.
When you only want to open a memory other than the departments 1 to 30, operate as follows.
3 [X]
|Department Code| [DP#]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for another department
ex.) To program the following to a department code 1.
Department Code 1:
Address 1 (Major Group/Minor Group):
Address 2 (Name):
03/11
VEGETABLE
Address 3 (Status 1):
Address 4 (Status 2):
Address 5 (Tax Status):
Address 6 (High Amount Limit):
Address 7 (Low Amount Limit):
0 (no ON-status)
7 (Sales data outputted to RKP3)
2 (Tax 2 taxable)
5000 ($50.00)
100 ($1.00)
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 3, depress [X].
1 [DP#] 1 [ST] 0311 [#] (2 [ST]) VEGETABLE [ST]
(3 [ST]) 0 [#] (4 [ST]) 7 [#] (5 [ST]) 2 [#] (6 [ST]) 5000 [#] (7 [ST]) 100 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P03
DEPARTMENT
01 DP
#01
01
0311
#02 DP
#03
#04
#05
01VEGETABLE
0
7
2
#06
#07
50.00
1.00
0433 16:35TM
•
Deletion
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Department Daily & GT and PLU Daily and GT Reset
Mode Lock: SET
Individual Department Deletion
3 [X] [ITEM CORR]
|Department Code| [DP#]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for another department to be deleted.
All Department Deletion
3 [X] [ITEM CORR]
[ALL VOID]
[AT/TL]
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ PLU Table Programming (Submode 4)
This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be changed, or
PLUs are to be deleted.
•
Programming or Changing
CONDITION
To program new PLUs or to change
any programmed contents of PLUs
except the following case:
When you enter 4 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
Any time outside a sale
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU
To change the linked Department
of a PLU with sales data not zero:
After PLU Reset
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
Please input PLU code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
As for details of each Address,
refer to the following pages.
(NOTE 2 on the next page.)
Barcode Scanning
4 [X]
|Address Nos| [#]
|PLU Code|
[PLU]
(NOTE 1 on the next page.)
for sequential-coded item only
Submode No.
Address 1: Link Department
|Department Code| [#]
(1 to 99)
1
[ST]
Address 2: PLU Name
Character Entries [ST]
max. 16 characters
2
[ST]
Operation
procedure
surrounded
by this line
is the same
as the
Address 3: 1st Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
3
[ST]
Address 4: 2nd Preset Price
Repeat for any
address within
the same PLU
by re-entry for
correction.
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
operation in
Submode 4.
4
[ST]
Address 5: 3rd Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
(NOTE 3)
5
[ST]
Address 6: 4th Preset Price
Repeat for
other
PLUs.
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
6
[ST]
Address 7: 5th Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
7
[ST]
Address 8: PLU Status 1
|Status Code to ON| [#]
8
[ST]
Address 9: PLU Status 2
|Status Code to ON| [#]
9
[ST]
Address 10: Tax Status
|Tax Code| [#]
10 [ST]
Address 11: PLU Group
|PLU Group Code| [#]
11 [ST]
(1 to 99)
Address 12: Set Menu Table
|Set Menu Table No.| [#]
12 [ST]
(1 to 50)
Address 13: Display Menu Table
|Display Menu Table No.| [#]
13 [ST]
(max. 10 digits)
Address 14: Stock Quantity
|Stock Quantity| [#]
(0 to 9999.99)
14 [ST]
Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity
|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]
15 [ST]
(0 to 9999.99)
Address 16: Takeout Tax Status
|Tax Code| [#]
(max. 4 digits)
16 [ST]
Address 17: Tare Table
|Tare Table No.| [#]
17 [ST]
1 to 9
Address 18: Unit Weight
|Unit Weight Table| [#]
18 [ST]
1 to 11
[ST]
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)
Executes DLL.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
NOTES:
1. The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary. If entered,
the designated Address (es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU Code designation.
2. A maximum of 2500 PLUs are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and allocation of
the RAM) . The “[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU” but not any PLU
Preset-code Keys.
3. When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address Designation
feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be omitted.
PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
1
Linked Department Code
Enter the 2-digit code of the department to which the PLU is linked. When a new PLU is
programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result if this entry is skipped.)
|
|
| [#]
1 to 99
2
PLU Name
Enter a maximum of 16 regular-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See the section 5.2
Character Entries. End with [ST].
When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-program name for
printing:
PLUxxxxxx
PLU Code
3
4
1st Preset Price
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)
•
•
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an
open PLU (open-price PLU).
2nd Preset Price
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)
•
•
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an
open PLU (open-price PLU).
•
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as
the 2nd preset price.
5
6
3rd Preset Price
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)
•
•
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an
open PLU (open-price PLU).
•
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as
the 3rd preset price.
4th Preset Price
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)
•
•
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an
open PLU (open-price PLU).
•
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as
the 4th preset price.
-- Continued on next page --
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
7
8
5th Preset Price
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU), enter a maximum of 6-digit price, and depress [#].
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)
•
•
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the PLU will be an
open PLU (open-price PLU).
•
If this address entry is skipped, the 1st preset price will be automatically programmed as
the 5th preset price.
Status 1 Selection
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 7 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code
may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.
•
Status
Item
Selective Status
Code
OFF
ON
Stock
Yes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stock Process
Non-stock
No
Net to S.I. 1?
Net to S.I. 2?
No
Yes
-- vacant --
Modifier Entry for this PLU
This PLU is used as:
Lock or Unlock?
Prohibited
Menu item
Allowed
Modifier item
Unlock (in use) Lock (not in use)
Setting Examples:
To set only Status 2 to ON ................ Enter 2 [#]
To set Statuses 2, 3, 7 to ON............ Enter 237 [#]
To set none of statuses to ON .......... Enter 0 [#]
9
Status 2 Selection
•
Enter the Status Codes 1 to 5 of which status must be set to ON. More than one code
may be entered. Enter 0 when none of the statuses should be set to ON.
Status
Item
Scale Entry
Selective Status
Code
OFF
ON
1
2
3
Prohibited
Optional
Compulsory
Manual Tare Entry
Compulsory
Canada Tax Symbol Print
(NOTE below)
Non-print
Print (A symbol “F”)
4
5
Combo Exemption Flag
No
Exemption
Using the [CODE SHIFT]
Possible
Not possible
key for this PLU
NOTES: 1. Canada tax symbol is assigned as follows.
“T” for the PST, “F” for the GST
2. Status Code 1 (Scale Entry) and Status Code 1 (Stock Process) of the
preceding address cannot be combined with one PLU.
-- Continued on next page --
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
10
Tax Status
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Tax.
| [#]
•
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable
1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable)
2: Tax 2
3: Tax 3
4: Tax 4
(More than one code can be entered for combining Tax 1 to Tax 4 taxable status. For
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)
NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status
of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.
11
12
PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports)
•
Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU belongs, and
depress [#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and depress [#].
Set Menu Table No.
|
|
| [#]
1 to 50
Enter the Set Menu Table No. (1 to 50), and depress [#]. The sub menu PLUs which link to
each table will be set later in a separate operation (Submode 42).
13
Display Menu Table
•
Enter a Display Menu Table No. which is programmed in the Submode 53 (Display Menu
Table Setting), then depress the [#] key. A maximum of 5 display menu table Nos. (max.
10 digit-value) can be entered. Enter 0, then depress the [#] key to cancel the display
menu table.
NOTE: When you enter the display menu tables of which Nos. are 1 to 9, add 0 before the
number.
ex.) When you want to program the display menu tables 1 and 2, enter 0102, then
depress the [#] key.
14
15
Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 has been entered in Address 8)
•
Enter the stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99). Use the [ . ] key if any
decimal portion is contained.
|
|
|
|
| [ . ] |
|
| [#]
0 to 9999.99
The entered quantity will replace the existing stock quantity value, if any.
Minimum Stock Quantity (applicable when Status Code 1 of Address 8 has been set to ON
and the Stock Quantity of Address 14 has been entered.)
•
Enter the minimum stock quantity of the PLU in max. 6 digits (0 to 9999.99; use the [ . ]
key if any decimal portion is contained.)
|
|
|
|
| [ . ] |
|
| [#]
0 to 9999.99
By setting a Minimum Stock Quantity value here, a short tone for warning will be generated
on entering a sale entry of this PLU to turn the stock quantity less than the preset minimum
stock quantity value.
-- Continued on next page --
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
-- Continued --
16
Takeout Tax Status Setting
This tax status is applied to a takeout transaction when the program option “Takeout feature”
has been selected. (For an eat-in transaction, a tax status which has been programmed in
Address 10 is applied.)
•
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Takeout Tax.
| [#]
|
|
|
|
0: Non-taxable
1: Tax 1
2: Tax 2
3: Tax 3
4: Tax 4
(More than one code can be entered for combining 1 to 4 taxable status. For
example, enter 12 to select Tax 1 and Tax 2 taxable status.)
NOTE: When a tax status has not been programmed to a PLU in this address, the tax status
of the PLU is determined by that of a linked department.
17
Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)
|
| [#]
Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later in a separate
operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a Tare Table No. set, the tare
weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically be subtracted from the total weight read
from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for
PLUs not needing any tare weight calculations.
18
Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)
|
|
| [#]
LB unit
Kg unit
0:
General Unit Weight (set in Submode 26)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
1 LB
2 LB
3 LB
4 LB
5 LB
6 LB
7 LB
8 LB
9 LB
1/2 LB
1/4 LB
1 Kg
2 Kg
3 Kg
4 Kg
5 Kg
6 Kg
7 Kg
8 Kg
9 Kg
9:
10:
11:
100 g
not applicable
NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a program option
selection.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ADDITIONAL NOTES
If a PLU is linked to an Other Income Department, the PLU is automatically set as Other Income PLU.
If a PLU is linked to a negative Department, the PLU is automatically set as negative PLU.
Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU will be determined by those of its link
department.
Receipt type (Itemized receipt or Single/Double receipt) of each PLU will be determined by those of its link
department.
Whether or not each PLU data is output to the Remote Kitchen Printers will be determined by the status of its link
department.
ex.) To program the following to a PLU code 20.
PLU Code 20: Address 1 (Link Department):
Address 2 (Name):
2
CHEESE BURGER
Address 3 (1st Price):
$2.00
Address 4 (2nd Price):
$1.80
Address 8 (Status 1):
5 (Condiment Entry Allowed)
Address 10 (Tax Status):
12 (Tax 1 & 2 taxable)
Address 11 (PLU Group):
3
Address 12 (Set Menu Table No.):
Address 13 (Display Menu Table No.):
Address 16 (Takeout Tax Status):
1
03 (Table 3)
1 (Tax 1 taxable)
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 4, depress [X].
20 [PLU] 1 [ST] 2 [#] (2 [ST]) CHEESE BURGER [ST]
(3 [ST]) 200 [#] (4 [ST]) 180 [#] 8 [ST] 5 [#] 10 [ST] 12 [#] (11 [ST]) 3 [#] (12 [ST]) 1 [#]
(13 [ST]) 03 [#] 16 [ST] 1 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P04
PLU
000020
#01
#02
PLU000020
02
CHEESE BURGER
#03
#04
#08
2.00@
1.80@
5
#10
#11
#12
#13
12
03
01
03
1
#16
00013
0003 10:17TM
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
•
Deletion
CONDITION
To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale
To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
Individual PLU Deletion
4 [X] [ITEM CORR]
|PLU Code| [PLU]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.
ex.) To delete PLU Code 120001 that was once programmed:
Journal Print
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 4, depress [X].
[ITEM CORR] 120001 [PLU]
[AT/TL]
P04 PLU
120001
PLU120001
----------------------------------------
00013
0006 10:24TM
All PLU Deletion
4 [X]
[ITEM CORR]
[ALL VOID]
[AT/TL]
•
PLU Programmed Data Copying
This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming another PLU
item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation.
CONDITION
To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs:
Any time outside a sale (except the following case)
To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero:
After PLU Reset
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
4 [X]
|PLU Code of the copy-destination| [PLU]
[NS]
|PLU Code of the copy-source| [PLU]
The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied to the copy-destination PLU
(except the PLU Code). Then follow the procedure on the page of Programming or
Changing to change data of any required Addresses.
ex.) To program the PLU Code 22 (BIG CHEESE BURGER) by copying the programmed data of the PLU Code
20 (CHEESE BURGER).
Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X]
22 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination)
[NS]
20 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source)
2 [ST] BIG CHEESEBURGER [ST] (Address 2, Name changed into: BIG CHEESEBURGER)
(3 [ST]) 300 [#] (Address 3, the 1st price changed into: $3.00)
(4 [ST]) 250 [#] (Address 4, the 2nd price changed into: $2.50)
[AT/TL]
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Journal Print
P04
PLU
000022
#00 000020
CHEESE BURGER
#02
#03
#04
BIG CHEESEBURGER
3.00@
2.50@
00002
0011 10:58TM
■ Time Setting or Adjustment (Submode 5)
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 5 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING TIME
01 TIME
12:34
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
5 [X]
|Hour|
|Minute|
[AT/TL]
(0 to 23) (00 to 59)
ex.) To set the time to “1:35 p.m. (13:35)”:
Mode Lock to SET, enter 5, depress [X].
Enter 1335, depress [AT/TL].
Journal Print
P05
TIME
13:35TM
0012 13:35TM
NOTE: If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of more than 59 is entered, it will result in an error.
The current date will not be changed by setting or adjusting the time.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Date Setting or Adjustment (Submode 6)
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 6 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING DATE
01 DATE
THURSDAY
02-11-1999
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
6 [X]
|Day-of-Week Code|
|Month|
(01 to 12)
|Day|
|Year|
[AT/TL]
(01 to 31) (1999, etc.)
0: SUN (Sunday)
1: MON (Monday)
2: TUE (Tuesday)
3: WED (Wednesday)
4: THU (Thursday)
5: FRI (Friday)
6: SAT (Saturday)
ex.) To set the date to Tuesday, 21st of December, 1999:
Mode Lock: SET, enter 6, depress [X]
Enter 212211999, depress [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P06
DATE
TUESDAY
12-21-1999
0014 13:37TM
NOTES:
1. A program option allows you to select the date order as follows.
•
•
•
Month-Day-Year (Initial Date Order)
Day-Month-Year
Year-Month-Day
2. The Day-of-week is programmable not to be printed on receipts.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Hourly Range Setting (Submode 7)
A maximum of 48 hourly ranges can be set. You can obtain sales data by each hourly range, also you can
designate a price level and a menu level for each day of the week.
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Hourly Range Reset and
Combo Sale Hourly Range Reset
When you enter 7 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
Mode Lock: SET
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING HOURLY
↓
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Address 1: Start Time
|Hour| |Minute| [#]
0 to 23 00 to 59
7 [X]
|Hourly Range| [NS]
1 [ST]
1 to 48
Address 2: Price Level and Menu
Level for Sunday
Submode No.
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
2 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 3: Price Level and Menu
Level for Monday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
3 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 4: Price Level and Menu
Level for Tuesday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
4 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 5: Price Level and Menu
Level for Wednesday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
5 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 6: Price Level and Menu
Level for Thursday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
6 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 7: Price Level and Menu
Level for Friday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
7 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Address 8: Price Level and Menu
Level for Saturday
|Menu Level| |Price Level| [#]
8 [ST]
1 to 5
1 to 5
Repeat until all the hourly ranges you want to set are entered. (max. 48 hourly ranges)
[AT/TL]
NOTES:
1. When you enter only a 1-digit code (1 to 5) for a price & menu level portion, the price level of
which code is entered will be designated.
2. Do not set an hourly range across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be
processed into that hourly range.
3. To reset the hourly range table once set, operate as follows.
7 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set the following to a hourly range 1.
Hourly Range 1:
Address 1 (Start Time):
Address 2 (Sunday):
Address 3 (Monday):
Address 4 (Tuesday):
Address 5 (Wednesday):
Address 6 (Thursday):
Address 7 (Friday):
1000 (10:00)
55 (Menu Level 5/Price Level 5)
11 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 1)
12 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 2)
13 (Menu Level 1/Price Level 3)
23 (Menu Level 2/Price Level 3)
34 (Menu Level 3/Price Level 4)
45 (Menu Level 4/Price Level 5)
Address 8 (Saturday):
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 7, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1000 [#] (2 [ST]) 55 [#] (3 [ST]) 11 [#] (4 [ST]) 12 [#] (5 [ST]) 13 [#] (6 [ST]) 23 [#]
(7 [ST]) 34 [#] (8 [ST]) 45 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P07
HOURLY
01#00
#01
#02
#03
#04
#05
#06
#07
#08
10:00TM
10:00TM
55
11
12
13
23
34
45
0069 19:06TM
■ Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys (Submode 8)
This programming is used to set a high or low amount limit for the items shown in the following list.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 8 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING AMOUNT LIMIT
01 AT/TL
↓
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
02 CHK
03 Chg
04 MISC
05 CPN
06 CREDIT1
07 CREDIT2
08 CREDIT3
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
8 [X]
|Key Code| [ST]
|Amount Limit| [#]
Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset
(Max. 7 digits for Key Codes 11 and 12)
[AT/TL]
(See the list on
the next page.)
Repeat for another key item.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Key
Item or Key to be applied
Key
Item or Key to be applied
Code
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[AT/TL] (Cash Tender)
8
[CREDIT 3] (Credit 3 Tender)
[CREDIT 4] (Credit 4 Tender)
[CREDIT 5] (Credit 5 Tender)
High Amount Limit common to all depts.
Low Amount Limit common to all depts.
[CHECK] (Check Tender)
[Chg] (Charge Tender)
9
10
11
12
13
[MISC] (Misc. Tender)
[CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender)
[CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender)
[CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender)
Charge Posting Limit Amount
common to all customers
ex.) To set a tender limit amount $100.00 on the [CHECK] key
Journal Print
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 8, depress [X].
2 [ST] 10000 [#] [AT/TL]
P08
#02
AMOUNT LIMIT
CHECK
100.00
0022 18:04TM
NOTES:
1. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of a department has been set, it prevails over the
Common High or Low Limit for all departments here.
2. The Amount Limit Set Value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is effective only
when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total key.
■ Non-taxable Amount Limit Setting (for Canada)/Gratuity Rate Setting (Submode 12)
This programming is used to set a non-taxable amount limit applied to Ontario, Canada. It is also used to set a
gratuity rate.
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Daily Financial Reset
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 12 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING CA TAX & TIP
01 CANADA TAX
0.00
0%
02 GRATUITY
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
12 [X]
1 [ST]
|Non-taxable Limit Amount| [#]
Max. 4 digits
*
(1 to 9999; 0 to reset)
2 [ST]
|Gratuity Rate| [#]
0.001 to 99.999%; use the [ . ] key
if a decimal portion is contained.
[AT/TL]
*
When a gratuity rate only is programmed
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set the following
Journal Print
•
•
Non-taxable Amount Limit: $20.00
Gratuity Rate: 5%
P12
CANADA TAX
GRATUITY
CA TAX & TIP
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 12, depress [X].
1 [ST] 2000 [#] (2 [ST]) 5 [#] [AT/TL]
20.00
5%
0028 20:10TM
■ Minor Group Name Programming (Submode 13)
This programming is used to set each minor group name. Association among a department, a minor group
and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 13 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MINOR GROUP
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
13 [X]
|Minor Group Code| [ST]
Character Entries
(See NOTE)
[ST]
[AT/TL]
(1 to 30)
*
Repeat for other groups
(max. 30 groups)
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)
ex.) To set “GREENSTUFF” for a minor group1
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 13, depress [X].
1 [ST] GREENSTUFF [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P13
01
MINOR GROUP
GREENSTUFF
0029 20:29TM
NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Minor Group name. One double-sized
character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Minor Gruop, an auto-preset data is assigned
as the Minor Group Name (GPxx; xx = Minor Group Code 01 to 30).
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Major Group Name Programming (Submode 14)
This programming is used to set each major group name. Association among a department, a minor group
and a major group should be set in the Department Table Programming (Submode 3).
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 14 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MAJOR
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
MGP
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
14 [X]
|Major Group Code| [ST]
Character Entries
(See NOTE)
[ST]
[AT/TL]
(1 to 10)
*
Repeat for other groups
(max. 10 groups)
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)
ex.) To set “OTHER” for a major group10
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 14, depress [X].
10 [ST] OTHER [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P14
10
MAJOR
OTHER
0030 20:48TM
NOTE: A maximum of 12 regular-sized characters may be set for each Major Group name. One double-sized
character occupies two regular-sized character’s space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a Major Group, an auto-preset data is assigned
as the Major Group Name (MGPxx; xx = Major Group Code 01 to 10).
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Customer File Table Setting (Submode 15)
This programming is used to set a customer file table(customer code, customer name, limit amount and price
level), which is used for the charge posting transaction.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 15 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING CUSTOMER
Please input customer code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Customer Card Reading through the MCR
Address 1: Customer Name
Character Entries [ST]
Max. 16 characters
15 [X]
|Customer File Code| [NS]
Max. 12 digits
1 [ST]
Address 2: Charge Posting Limit
Amount for each Customer
Submode No.
|Charge Posting Limit Amount| [#]
2 [ST]
Max. 8 digits
Address 3: Price Level for each
Customer
|Price Level| [#]
3 [ST]
1 to 5
Repeat for another Customer file.
[AT/TL]
ex.) To program the following to a customer file code 5.
Customer File Code 5:
Address 1 (Customer Name): SHEARER
Address 2 (Limit Amount):
Address 3 (Price Level):
$500.00
2
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 15, depress [X].
5 [NS] 1 [ST] SHEARER [ST] (2 [ST]) 50000 [#] (3 [ST]) 2 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P15 CUSTOMER
000000000005
#01
#02
#03
SHEARER
500.00
2
00006
0034 12:56TM
NOTES:
1. A maximum of 5000 customer file tables can be used.
2. When a charge posting limit amount is set for each customer in this programming, it prevails over
the common limit amount programmed in the Submode 8.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Combination Report Table Programming (Submode 19)
This programming is used to make a combination report table which is described in the section 4.3
Combination Reports on page 4-9.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 19 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING COMBI REPORT
01
02
03
1103000000
0000000000
0000000000
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
19 [X]
|Table No.| [ST]
|Report Code| [#]
[ST]
[AT/TL]
1 to 3
3 to 48 (See the Report
Code Table below), or 0
to delete the table.
*
Repeatable for max. five different reports
combination.
Repeat for other tables.
* (For sequentially programming Tables, the
Table No. specification can be skipped.)
Report Code Table
Report
Code
Report Name
Mode for output
X
*
Z
*
GTX GTZ
3
4
Financial
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
All Cashier
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
6
Credit Card Company Sales
Department Group
8
9
Each Media Sales and In-drawer Total
Hourly Range
10
11
12
13
14
15
24
*
*
All Department
*
*
*
*
All Media Sales and Cash-in-drawer
All PLU Sales
*
All PLU Stock
All Customer File
*
*
PLU Group
*
*
*: output
Blank: no output
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Report Code Table
Report Name
Report
Code
Mode for output
X
*
Z
*
GTX GTZ
25
30
31
43
44
47
48
Day Part
Check Track with Sales
Check Track without Sales
Combo Sales
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Hourly Combo Sales
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out (periodic)
*
*
*
*
*: output
Blank: no output
ex.) To program the following reports to a combination report table 1.
•
•
•
3: Financial
4: All Cashier
47 Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 19, depress [X].
1 [ST] 3 [#] 4 [#] 47 [#] [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P19
#01
COMBI REPORT
0304470000
0035 13:38TM
NOTES:
1. When changes are made on report combination in a table, entirely or partially, program all the
reports in that table again.
2. An error will result if a Report Code that has already been entered is attempted to enter again in
the same table.
3. In Table No.1, auto-preset report combination of Report 11 (All Depts) and Report 3 (Financial) is
programmed. It will be active as Table No.1 content unless no data are programmed for Table
No.1.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ PLU Stock Loading or Changing (Submode 24)
This submode loads or changes the stock quantities of PLUs with the Stock-process status, as part of stock
controls. The stock of a PLU may be entered initially in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation
(Submode 4), and may be adjusted in this operation, from day to day, as the stock increases due to delivery
from wholesalers, etc. or as the stock decreases due to damages or losses.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING STOCK
000001 PLU000001
580
Please input PLU code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
24 [X]
|PLU Code| [PLU]
|Adding Quantity|
0 to 9999.99
[STOCK]
[AT/TL]
* (Repeatable for
the PLU of the
next sequential
code)
[VOID] Subtracting|
*
Quantity
0 to 9999.99
|
Repeat for other PLUs for stock change.
ex.) To subtract 150 from 580 of a current stock quantity of a PLU 1.
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 24, depress [X].
1 [PLU] [VOID] 150 [STOCK] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P24
000001
STOCK
PLU000001
-150
430
0038 14:07TM
NOTES:
1. When you enter 24 and depress the [X] key, a current stock quantity of each PLU will be
displayed.
2. The total stock quantity of a PLU after the addition or subtraction must not exceed the value
range from 0 through 9999.99. Otherwise, the Adding or Subtracting Quantity entry will result in
an error. Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained.
3. The PLU Code here must exist in the PLU Table file and the PLU must be set with Stock-process
status.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting (Submode 26)
In the PLU Table Programming operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be set with a
Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit Weight is set
here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments or PLUs without any
Individual Unit Weight designation.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 26 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING TARE SCALE
↓
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
0.001b
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
26 [X]
|Tare Table No.| [ST]
|Tare Weight| [#]
1 to 9
*
Only to set
the General
Unit Weight
0 to 999 (Unit: 1/100
LB or gram. Example:
enter 13 for 0.13 LB.)
Repeat for other tables.
* (For sequentially programming tables, the
Table No. specification can be skipped.)
10 [ST]
**
|General Unit Weight Code| [#]
[AT/TL]
1 to 11
LB Unit
1 LB
2 LB
Kg Unit
1 Kg
2 Kg
** Only to set the
Tare Weight
1:
2
3
3 LB
3 Kg
4
4 LB
4 Kg
5
5 LB
5 Kg
6
6 LB
6 Kg
7
7 LB
7 Kg
8
8 LB
8 Kg
9
9 LB
9 Kg
10
11
1/2 LB
1/4 LB
100 g
Not applicable
ex.) To set the following.
Journal Print
•
•
Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 0.13 LB
General Weight 2 LB (Code 2).
P26
#01
#10
TARE SCALE
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 26, depress [X].
1 [ST] 13 [#] 10 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]
0.131b
21b
0042 15:26TM
NOTE: The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1LB or 1Kg).
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ PLU Preset-code Key/Display Key Setting (Submode 27)
This programming is used to assign a PLU code to each PLU Preset-code key (SFKC 96), and also used to
assign a display menu table No. to each display key (SFKC 210). You can assign a maximum of 5 different
PLU codes or 5 different display menu table Nos. to one key of the keyboard.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 27 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU KEY
S1
01
02
03
04
05
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
27 [X]
|Keyboard No.| [ST]
|PLU Code or Display Menu Table No.|
[KEY]
[AT/TL]
1: ECR Keyboard 1
2: ECR Keyboard 2
3: ECR Keyboard 3
4: ECR Keyboard 4
5: ECR Keyboard 5
Max. 6 digits for PLU Code
1 to 99 for Display Menu Table No.
(Enter 0 to close a key)
Depress
the
required
key on
the ECR
Keyboard.
Repeat for other Keys.
ex.) To assign the PLU code 9 to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 2 and the display menu table No. 2
to the required key on the ECR Keyboard 5.
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 27, depress [X].
2 [ST] 9 [required key of SFKC 96] 5 [ST] 2 [required key of SFKC 210] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P27
2
PLU
PLU KEY
Keyboard Phase No.
Location Code (left); refer to REMARK on the next page.
PLU Code assigned to a key (right)
#103 000009
5
DISPLAY
#075 02
0046 16:21TM
NOTES:
1. When an entry of PLU code or display menu table No. is skipped and a [KEY] is simply
depressed in the above key operation, the preprogrammed PLU code or display menu table No.
of the KEY will be displayed.
2. If “0” is entered as PLU Code or display menu table No. in the above sequence, the KEY will be
closed. Pressing the closed KEY in sale entry will be ignored.
3. The five phases of the keyboard can be shifted by the [MENU] keys in actual sales transaction.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
REMARK: When a PLU code (display menu No.) is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key (Display Key) on the
ECR Keyboard in the operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the
absolute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code (display menu No.).
The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboard are shown below.
ECR Keyboard
1
2
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
3
93
4
94
5
95
6
96
7
97
8
98
9
99
10
11
12
13
14
15
100
101
102
103
104
105
Navigation Key
181
182
183
184
185
Navigation Key 1
Navigation Key 2
Navigation Key 3
Navigation Key 4
Navigation Key 5
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ PLU Group Name Programming (Submode 29)
This programming is used to set each PLU group name. Grouping of each PLU should be set in the PLU
Table Programming (Submode 4).
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 29 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING PLU GROUP
01 PLU GP01
↓
02 PLU GP02
03 PLU GP03
04 PLU GP04
05 PLU GP05
06 PLU GP06
07 PLU GP07
08 PLU GP08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
29 [X]
|PLU Group Code| [ST]
Character Entries
(See NOTE)
[ST]
[AT/TL]
(1 to 99)
*
Repeat for other groups
(max. 99 groups)
* (For sequentially programming Group Codes
and Names, the code specification can be skipped.)
ex.) To set “BEER” for a PLU group 2
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 29, depress [X].
2 [ST] BEER [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P29
02
PLU GROUP
BEER
0050 16:52TM
NOTE: A maximum of 16 regular-sized characters may be set for each PLU Group name. One double-sized
character occupies two regular-sized characters’ space. Also see the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the
beginning of this chapter. If no name is programmed for a PLU Group, an auto-preset data is assigned
as the PLU Group Name (PLU GPxx; xx = PLU Group Code 01 to 99).
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ RKP Message Programming (Submode 30)
This programming is used to set 20 RKP messages (a maximum of 20 characters x 2 lines for each), and also
used to designate an RKP on which each message is outputted. If your printer is the TM-300, you can select a
color for each message.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 30 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING RKP MESSAGE
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Guest Card Reading through the MCR
Address 1: Guest Name
|1st Line Message Entries| [ST]
Max. 20 characters
Initial Setting: Blank for all characters
30 [X]
|Message No.| [NS]
1 [ST]
1 to 20
Submode No.
Address 1: Guest Name
|2nd Line Message Entries| [ST]
Max. 20 characters
2 [ST]
Initial Setting: Blank for all characters
Address 1: Guest Name
|RKP No. of the destination| [#]
Max. 4 digits: Multiple RKPs are selectable.
(NOTE 2 below) Initial Setting: RKP No. 1
3 [ST]
Address 1: Guest Name
|Color| [#]
0: Black (Initial Setting)
1: Red
4 [ST]
Repeat for another message.
[AT/TL]
ex.) To set the following to the RKP message 1.
Journal Print
•
•
•
1st Line:
2nd Line:
Destination: 13 (RKP Nos. 1 and 3)
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE
PROGRAMMABLE!
P30
01
RKP MESSAGE
#01
#02
#03
20 RKP MESSAGES ARE
PROGRAMMABLE!
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 30, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 20 [SPACE] RKP [SPACE]
MESSAGES [SPACE] ARE [SPACE] [ST]
(2 [ST]) PROGRAMMABLE! [ST] (3 [ST])
13 [#] [AT/TL]
13
0051 17:01TM
NOTES:
1. When you fill one whole line with all blanks, it will result in a one line space.
2. When you want to designate the RKP Nos. 1 and 3 as the destinations, enter 13, then depress
the [#] key.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Display Message Programming (Submode 31)
This programming is used to set a display message which is displayed in the 16-digit dot window provided to
the customer display and the LCD operator display while the mode lock of the register is in “LOCK” position. A
display message can be used for information, welcome greeting, etc.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 31 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING DISPLAY MSG
01
02
03
04
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
31 [X]
|Message Line No.| [ST]
(1 to 4; max. 4 lines)
Character Entries
(Max. 16 characters per
line. Regular-size only.)
[ST]
[AT/TL]
*
Repeat for other lines.
* Allowed for sequential Line No. only
ex.) To set a message “WE SERVE THE CHOICEST FOOD. PLEASE ENJOY YOUR DINNER.”
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 35, depress [X].
1 [ST] WE [SPACE] SERVE [SPACE] THE [SPACE] CHO [ST]
(2 [ST]) ICEST [SPACE] FOOD. [ST] (3 [ST]) PLEASE [SPACE] ENJOY [SPACE] YOU [ST]
(4 [ST]) R [SPACE] DINNER. [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P31
DISPLAY MSG
WE SERVE THE CHO
ICEST FOOD.
PLEASE ENJOY YOU
R DINNER.
#01
#02
#03
#04
0052 17:59TM
NOTES:
1. You can select either of two features; “Scrolling Display; initial setting” or “16 Characters Held
Display”. If you select the feature “16 Characters Held Display”, refer to the section 9.2 Store
Message Display on page 9-2 (Operator’s Guide) to display each message.
2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” feature is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can be
entered consecutively after designating Line No. 1 at first and depressing [ST] for each line end.
3. A character must be regular-sized only.
4. A DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so selected by a
program option.
5. A message display on the LCD operator display is possible when the feature “16 Characters Held
Display” has been selected.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key (Submode 35)
This programming is used to set an amount limit for the [DISC] key.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 35 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING LIMIT TABLE
01 DISC
0.00
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
35 [X]
1 [ST]
|Limit Amount| [#]
Max. 6 digits
[AT/TL]
Enter 0 to reset the limt.
ex.) To set $5.00 as a limit amount
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 35, depress [X].
1 [ST] 500 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P35
DISC
LIMIT TABLE
5.00
0067 18:39TM
NOTE: The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transaction entries.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Set Menu Table Programming (Submode 42)
This programming is used to set a Set Menu Table and their respective Sub Menu PLUs. If a PLU is
programmed with a Set Menu Table No. (Address 12 of the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING), the PLU will be a
main menu PLU of the Set Menu Table. When the main menu PLU is entered in a sale, the sub menu PLUs
which have been programmed in the Set Menu Table will be automatically entered (Preset Set Menu), or other
PLUs can be manually entered as sub menu items (Open Set Menu).
•
Programming
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 42 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING SET MENU
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input table No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Repeat for another table.
*
42 [X]
|Set Menu Table No.| [NS]
1 to 50 (Enter the No.
1 [ST]
|Sub Menu PLU Code| [PLU]
[#]
[AT/TL]
programmed to the Main
Menu PLU in Submode 4.)
Repeat other sub menu PLUs to be contained
in the same table. (Max. 7 PLUs)
2 [ST]
|Enterable Qty of Sub Menu PLUs| [#]
0 to 30
* (For sequentially programming tables, the Table No. specification can be skipped.)
ex.) To set the following sub menu PLUs to a set menu table No. 1.
Journal Print
Sub Menu PLUs:
30, 40, 50
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 42, depress [X].
P42
01
SET MENU
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 30 [PLU] 40 [PLU]
50 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]
#01
000030
000040
000050
0072 19:40TM
NOTES:
1. To make a preset set menu, enter PLUs after the key sequence “1 [ST]” as shown above. If
changing a preset set menu into an open set menu, operate the key sequence “1 [ST] 0 [#]”
after designating the table No.
2. To make an open set menu, depress the [#] key immediately after the key sequence “1 [ST]”.
The setting of the enterable quantity of sub menu PLUs is applied only to an open set menu. If its
quantity is programmed, the set menu entry will be automatically finalized when the quantity of
sub menu PLUs reaches the programmed quantity.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
•
Deletion
CONDITION
OPERATION
42 [X]
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
[ITEM CORR]
|Set Menu Table No.| [NS]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.
Journal Print
P42
02
SET MENU
----------------------------------------
0074 19:53TM
■ Combo Sale Table Programming (Submode 43)
This programming is used to set a combo sales table.
•
Programming
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 43 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING COMBO
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input COMBO code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
As for details of each address,
refer to the following page.
As for details of each address,
refer to the following pages.
Address 1: Combo Table Name
Character Entries [ST]
Max. 16 characters
43 [X]
|Combo Table No.| [NS]
1 [ST]
1 to 99
Address 2: Grouping Item 1
|Grouping Item| [#]
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Grouping Item| [#]
2 [ST]
Submode No.
Address 3: Grouping Item Code 1
3 [ST]
Address 4: Grouping Item 2
4 [ST]
Address 5: Grouping Item Code 2
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Grouping Item| [#]
5 [ST]
Address 6: Grouping Item 3
6 [ST]
Address 7: Grouping Item Code 3
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Grouping Item| [#]
7 [ST]
Address 8: Grouping Item 4
8 [ST]
Address 9: Grouping Item Code 4
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Grouping Item| [#]
9 [ST]
Address 10: Grouping Item 5
10 [ST]
Address 11: Grouping Item Code 5
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Grouping Item| [#]
11 [ST]
Address 12: Grouping Item 6
12 [ST]
Address 13: Grouping Item Code 6
|Grouping Item Code| [#]
|Priority Code| [#]
13 [ST]
Address 14: Priority
14 [ST]
Address 15: Day-of-Week Designation
|Day-of-Week Code| [#]
|Hour/Minute| [#]
15 [ST]
Address 16: Start Time
16 [ST]
Address 17: End Time
|Hour/Minute| [#]
17 [ST]
Address 18: Process Status
|Process Status Code| [#]
|Process Value| [#]
18 [ST]
Address 19: Process Value
19 [ST]
Address 20: Grouping Item Designation
|Grouping Item Designation Code| [#]
20 [ST]
Repeat for another combo table.
[AT/TL]
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Combo Sale Table Programming Contents
Description of Programming Contents
Address No.
2,4,6,8,10,12 Grouping Item
Enter 1 for a department item, 2 for a PLU item. Entry of “0” will be ignored.
NOTE: Do not set a department together with a PLU which is linked to the department in the
same combo sale table.
3,5,7,9,11,13 Grouping Item Code
Enter 1 to 99 for a department item, a max. 6-digit code for a PLU item.
Priority Code
14
Enter 1 to 99. (Smaller code has a priority; 1 is the first priority.)
Entry of “0” will be ignored.
15
Day-of-Week Designation
Enter a max. 7-digit value combining the following code.
1: Sunday
5: Thursday
6: Friday
7: Saturday
0: No designation
2: Monday
3: Tuesday
4: Wednesday
ex.) When you designate Monday and Thursday, enter 25.
Start/End Time
Enter “Hour” (0 to 23), then “Minute” (00 to 59).
Process Status
16,17
18
Enter a 1-digit code from the following codes.
1: Designated Grouping Item Free of Charge
2: %- on Whole Grouping
3: Dollar Discount on Whole Grouping
4: %- on Designated Grouping Item
5: Dollar Discount on Designated Grouping Item
0: Fixed Price
19
20
Process Value
Effective value depends on the process status as follows.
Process Status 0:
Process Status 2 or 4:
Process Status 3 or 5:
Fixed Price 0 to 999999
% Rate 0 to 99.999
Dollar Discount 0 to 999999
Grouping Designation
Enter a 1-digit value from 1 to 6.
NOTE: This address is effective when you have selected 1, 4 or 5 in the process status
selection.
ex.) To set the following to a combo table 1.
Combo Table 1: Address 1 (Combo Name):
COMBO A
Address 2 (Grouping Item 1):
Address 3 (Grouping Item 1 Code):
Address 4 (Grouping Item 2):
Address 5 (Grouping Item 2 Code):
Address 6 (Grouping Item 3):
Address 7 (Grouping Item 3 Code):
Address 14 (Priority):
2 (PLU)
100
2 (PLU)
200
2 (PLU)
300
10
Address 15 (Day-of-Week Designation):
Address 16 (Start Time):
1 (Sunday)
1030 (10:30)
Address 17 (End Time):
1400 (14:00)
Address 18 (Process Status):
1 (Designated Grouping Item Free of
1 Charge)
Address 20 (Grouping Item Designation):
2 (Grouping Item 2)
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 43, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] COMBO A [ST] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] (3 [ST]) 100 [#] (4 [ST]) 2 [#] (5 [ST]) 200 [#]
(6 [ST]) 2 [#] (7 [ST]) 300 [#] 14 [ST] 10 [#] (15 [ST]) 1 [#] (16 [ST]) 1030 [#] (17 [ST]) 1400 [#]
(18 [ST]) 1 [#] 20 [ST] 2 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P43
01
COMBO
#01
COMBO A
#02
#03
#04
#05
#06
#07
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
#20
2
000100
2
000200
2
000300
10
1
10:30TM
14:00TM
1
2
0078 22:37TM
•
Deletion
CONDITION
OPERATION
43 [X]
After Combo Sale Reset
Mode Lock: SET
[ITEM CORR]
|Combo Table No.| [NS]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for other tables to be deleted.
Journal Print
P43
01
COMBO
----------------------------------------
0079 22:50TM
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Guest Check Commercial Message Programming (Submode 45)
This programming is used to set a commercial message printed on a guest check.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 45 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING INVO CM MSG
1
2
3
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Repeat for another line.
45 [X]
|Line No.| [ST]
1 to 3
(For sequentially programming
lines, the line number
specification can be skipped.)
Character Entries
[ST]
[AT/TL]
max. 40 characters/line
ex.) To set a commercial message “SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00” on the line No. 1.
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 45, depress [X].
1 [ST] SPECIAL LUNCH [SPACE] MENU [SPACE] FROM [SPACE] 11:00 [SPACE] TO [SPACE]
13:00 [ST] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P45
#01
INVO CM MSG
SPECIAL LUNCH MENU FROM 11:00 TO 13:00
0080 23:06TM
NOTES:
1. For each line, a maximum of 40 regular-sized characters or 20 double-sized characters may be
entered. A combination of both types is also available.
2. If programming blanks for all three lines, no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is
programmed, the two other lines will result in two lines space.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Day Part Setting (Submode 46)
A maximum of 6 day parts can be set. You can obtain major group sales data by each day part.
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Day Part Reset
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 46 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING DAY PART
01
02
03
04
05
06
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
46 [X]
|Hour| |Minute| [#]
[AT/TL]
Enter the time that ends
each day part, in the 24-
hour system.
Repeat until all the day parts are entered. (max. 6 day parts)
ex.) To set the following day part table.
Day Part 1: Up to 10:00*
Day Part 2: 10:01 to 14:00
Day Part 3: 14:01 to 18:00
Day Part 4: 18:01 to 22:00
*
(The first day part is automatically continued from 22:01 of the preceding day.)
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 46, depress [X].
1000 [#] 1400 [#] 1800 [#] 2200 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P46
DAY PART
10:00TM
14:00TM
18:00TM
22:00TM
0083 10:40TM
NOTES:
1. A maximum of 6 day parts can be set.
2. To change the table of day parts once set, partially or entirely, do the entire setting operation over
again.
2. To reset the day parts table once set, operate:
Mode Lock: SET
46 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]
Then no day part sales data will be outputted on the reports.
3. Do not set a day part across 24:00, such as “from 23:00 to 1:00”. If set, no data will be processed
into that day part.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Employee Table Setting (Submode 50)
This programming is used to assign a cashier code and a job code to each employee.
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
Daily and GT Reset
When you enter 50 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
Mode Lock: SET
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING EMPLOYEE
Please input Employee code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Guest Card Reading through the MCR
Address 1: Employee Name
Character Entries [ST]
Max. 12 characters
50 [X]
|Employee Code| [NS]
1 [ST]
1 to 9999
Submode No.
*
Address 2: Cashier Code
|Cashier Code| [#]
2 [ST]
0 to 99
Address 3: Job Code
|Job Code| [#]
Max. 20 digits
3 [ST]
Repeat for another employee.
* Repeatable from here if an employee code is sequential.
[AT/TL]
Employee Table Programming Contents
Description of Programming Contents
Address No.
2
Cashier Code
Enter a manager-assign code (1 to 99). A cashier for which 0 has been entered for a
cashier code cannot sign ON on the register.
NOTE: Do not set the same cashier code for multiple employees.
3
Job Code
Enter a max. 20-digit value combining the job codes 1 to 10. (When you enter a 1-digit
numeric 1 to 9, add 0 before the numeric.) As a result, a maximum of 10 job codes can be
assigned to each employee.
NOTE: Each job definition should be programmed in the Job Code/ Working Hours Setting
(Submode 51).
NOTE: A maximum of 200 employees can be managed.
ex.) To set the following to an employee No. 1.
Employee No. 1:
Address 1 (Name):
JONES
Address 2 (Cashier Code):
Address 3 (Job Code):
1
010203 (Job Code 1,2,3)
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 50, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] JONES [ST] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] (3 [ST]) 010203 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P50
EMPLOYEE
0001
#01
#02
#03
00005
JONES
01
010203
0086 13:04TM
•
Deletion
CONDITION
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
Daily and GT Reset
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET
50 [X]
[ITEM CORR]
|Employee Code| [NS]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for another employee to be deleted.
Journal Print
P50
0002
EMPLOYEE
----------------------------------------
00004
0091 15:53TM
■ Job Code/Working Hours Setting (Submode 51)
This programming is used to define each job and also set regular working hours for each job.
CONDITION
OPERATION
After Employee Clock-in/Clock-out
Daily and GT Reset
When you enter 51 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
Mode Lock: SET
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING JOB CODE
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Guest Card Reading through the MCR
Address 1: Job Name
Character Entries [ST]
Max. 12 characters
51 [X]
|Job Code| [NS]
1 to 10
1 [ST]
Address 2: Job Status
Submode No.
|Job Status| [#]
2 [ST]
0 to 3
Address 1: Daily Regular Working
Hour
|Daily Regular Working Hour for each Job| [#]
11 [NS]
1 [ST]
1 to 24
Address 2: Weekly Regular
Working Hour
|Weekly Regular Working Hour for each Job| [#]
2 [ST]
1 to 99
Address 3: Time Unit
|Time Unit for each Job| [#]
3 [ST]
0 to 4
Repeat for another job.
[AT/TL]
Job Code Programming Contents
Address No.
2
Description of Programming Contents
Job Status
Select one status from the following.
0: Normal
1: Chief Cashier
2: Server
3: ECR Operation Prohibited
Working Hour Programming Contents
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
1
2
3
8 hours is initially set as a regular working hours for each job.
40 hours is initially set as a weekly working hours for each job.
Select one unit from the following.
0: None
1: 5 minutes unit
2: 15 minutes unit
3: 30 minutes unit
4: 60 minutes unit
ex.) To set the following.
Job Code 1: Job Code Address
Address 1 (Job Name):
CASHIER
Address 2 (Job Status): 0 (Normal)
Working Hour Address
Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour):
7 (7 Hours)
Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 35 (35 Hours)
Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Job Code 2: Job Code Address
Address 1 (Job Name):
COOK
Address 2 (Job Status): 3 (ECR Operation Prohibited)
Working Hour Address
Address 1 (Daily Regular Working Hour):
Address 2 (Weekly Regular Working Hour): 45 (45 Hours)
Address 3 (Time Unit): 0 (None)
9 (9 Hours)
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 51, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] CASHIER [ST] (2 [ST]) 0 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 7 [#] (2 [ST]) 35 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#]
2 [NS] 1 [ST] COOK [ST] (2 [ST]) 3 [#] 11 [NS] 1 [ST] 9 [#] (2 [ST]) 45 [#] (3 [ST]) 0 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P51
01
JOB CODE
#01
#02
CASHIER
0
11
#01
#02
#03
7
35
0
02
11
#01
#02
COOK
3
#01
#02
#03
9
45
0
0089 15:43TM
■ Tender Up Table Setting (Submode 52)
This programming is used to set an amount table for the[TENDER UP] key. On how to use the [TENDER UP] key,
refer to section 9.30 Sale Finalization by Media Keys (Payment of A Sale) on page 9-20 (Operator’s Guide).
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 52 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING TENDER UP
01
0.00
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
52 [X]
|Tender Up Amount| [#]
[AT/TL]
Max. 8 digits
Repeatable for 10 amounts. (NOTE 1 on the next page)
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set the following tender up table.
$50.00, $100.00, $150.00, $200.00
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 52, depress [X].
5000 [#] 10000 [#] 15000 [#] 20000 [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P52
TENDER UP
50.00
100.00
150.00
200.00
0100 16:48TM
NOTES:
1. A tender up amount should be set from a smaller to a larger.
2. If a tender up table has been programmed as follows, $50.00, $100.00, $150.00, an error will
occur when you depress the [TENDER UP] key for a sales total of more than $150.
3. To reset the tender up table once set, operate as follows.
52 [X] 0 [#] [AT/TL]
■ Display Menu Table Setting (Submode 53)
This programming is used to set a display menu table corresponding to each [DISPLAY] key.
•
Programming
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 53 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MENU TABLE
↓
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Please input table No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
A maximum of 20 PLU items can be
entered in one display menu table.
Address 1: Guest Name
|PLU Code| [PLU]
Max. 6 digits
53 [X]
|Display Menu No.| [NS]
1 [ST]
[#]
1 to 99
Address 2: Charge Posting Limit
Amount for each Guest
Submode No.
|Select Status| [#]
0: Select Allowed
2 [ST]
1: Select Prohibited
(NOTE on the next page)
Repeat for another display menu table.
[AT/TL]
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set the following PLU items in a display menu table No. 1.
PLU Codes 100, 105, 110, 115
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 53, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 100 [PLU] 105 [PLU] 110 [PLU] 115 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]
Journal Print
P53
01
MENU TABLE
#01
000100
000105
000110
000115
0102 17:26TM
NOTE: Depressing the [SELECT] key in a sales transaction causes an error if the corresponding display menu
table has the “Select Prohibited” status.
•
Deletion
CONDITION
OPERATION
53 [X]
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
[ITEM CORR]
|Display Menu No.| [NS]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for another display menu table to be deleted.
Journal Print
P53
05
MENU TABLE
----------------------------------------
0103 17:28TM
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing (Submode 60)
This programming is used to set or change each PLU price.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 60 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING PRICE
S1
Please input PLU code.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Repeatable for other PLUs
60 [X]
|PLU Code| [PLU]
Max. 6 digits
[PLU Preset-code Key]
[MENU 1 to 5]
|Price Level| [ST]
|New Preset Price| [#]
[AT/TL]
1 to 5
Max. 6 digits
Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you
change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level
designation can be skipped.
•
•
•
When a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be displayed on the LCD operator display.
After a [MENU] key is depressed, a Keyboard No. will be held until another [MENU] key is depressed.
When the programming is completed by the [AT/TL] key depression, the Keyboard No. 1 will be
automatically regained.
To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply depress the
[#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible.
ex.) To change a price of the PLU Code 21 as follows.
Journal Print
•
•
$5.00 (Price Level 1)
$2.80 (Price Level 3)
P60
000021
PRICE
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 60, depress [X].
21 [PLU] 1 [ST] 500 [#] 3 [ST] 280 [#] [AT/TL]
PLU000021
#01
#03
5.00@
2.80@
0111 18:35TM
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
■ Printer Table Setting (Submode 71)
This programming is used to set a printer table. You can set two printer tables.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you enter 71 and depress the [X] key,
the screen shown below will appear.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING PRINTER
01 OUTPUT SIDE1
02 SIDE1 STATUS
03 OUTPUT SIDE2
04 SIDE2 STATUS
05 CONNECT PRT
06 BAUD RATE
Please input item No.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Address 1: Destination of Output (Printer Table 1)
71 [X]
1 [NS]
|Destination of Output| [ST]
|Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]
*
When the multiple destinations are designated
Address 2: Connection Status (Printer Table 1)
2 [NS]
|Destination of Output| [ST]
|Connection Status| [#]
*
When the multiple destinations are designated
Address 3: Destination of Output (Printer Table 2)
3 [NS]
|Destination of Output| [ST]
|Terminal ID/Port No.| [#]
*
When the multiple destinations are designated
Address 4: Connection Status (Printer Table 2)
4 [NS]
|Destination of Output| [ST]
|Connection Status| [#]
*
When the multiple destinations are designated
Address 5: Printer Model
5 [NS]
|Port No.| [ST]
|Printer| [#]
*
When the multiple ports are designated
Address 6: Transmission Speed
6 [NS]
|Port No.| [ST]
|Transmission Speed| [#]
[AT/TL]
*
When the multiple ports are designated
* Repeatable from here if each code is sequential.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Printer Table Setting Contents
Address No.
Description of Programming Contents
1, 3
Destination of Output
Destination of data output is as follows.
1: Receipt
2: RKP 1
3: RKP 2
4: RKP 3
5: RKP 4
6: Journal
Terminal ID/Port No.
Enter a 2-digit terminal ID No. and a 1-digit port No.
NOTE: If your system is the standalone system, enter only a 1-digit port No.
2, 4
Destination of Output
Destination of data output is as follows.
1: Receipt
2: RKP 1
3: RKP 2
4: RKP 3
5: RKP 4
6: Journal
Connection Status
Connection status is as follows.
0: OFF (Disconnection)
1: ON (Connection)
NOTE: When a terminal ID/port No. is entered, a connection status will be automatically set
to “ON” (Connection).
5
Port No.
Port No. is as follows.
1: Port 1
2: Port 2
3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)
Printer
A printer connectable is as follows.
1: TM-300 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4, Journal)
2: TM-T88 (Receipt, RKP 1 to 4)
3: BRST-10 (Receipt)
0: None
6
Port No.
Port No. is as follows.
1: Port 1
2: Port 2
3: Port 3 (Hardware Option)
Transmission Speed
0: 19200 bps
1: 9600 bps
ex.) To set the following to a printer table 1.
Printer Table 1
Address 1 (Destination of Output):
1 (Receipt)/1 (Port 1)
2 (RKP 1)/2 (Port 2)
6 (Journal)/2 (Port 2)
Address 2 (Connection Status):
Address 5 (Printer):
1: ON for all the destinations
1 (Port 1) for 3 (BRST-10)
2 (Port 2) for 1 (TM-300)
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 71, depress [X].
1 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 2 [#] 6 [ST] 2 [#] 2 [NS] 1 [ST] 1 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] 6 [ST] 1 [#] 5 [NS]
1 [ST] 3 [#] (2 [ST]) 1 [#] [AT/TL]
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Journal Print
P71
1
PRINTER
#01
#02
#06
1 1
1 2
1 2
2
5
#01
#02
#06
1
1
1
#01
#02
3
1
0131 10:20TM
NOTE: A connection status of each RKP can also be changed by an operation in the MGR mode. For details,
refer to the section 2.5 RKP Table Change on page 2-3 of the manager’s guide.
■ %+ and %- Preset Rate Setting
A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once a rate
is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate. If a rate is
entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated instead.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you complete the following
programming, the screen shown below will
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go
back to the program menu screen.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC
01 %1RATE
02 %2RATE
03 %3RATE
04 %4RATE
05 %5RATE
06 %6RATE
07 %7RATE
08 %8RATE
↓
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
|Preset Rate| [%+] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate)
(0.001 to 99.999 (%);
use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)
|Preset Rate| [%-] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate)
|Preset Rate| [%3] to [%8] (For Percent Discount Preset Rates for Additional %- Keys)
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set 10% on [%+] Key:
Mode Lock: SET
Enter 10, depress [%+].
To reset the rate once set:
Enter 0, depress the required % key.
(Then the % key will always require a manual rate entry in sale entries.)
Journal Print
P00
%+
%1RATE
0139 10:49TM
10%
■ Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers (SI1 and SI2)
If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be
programmed on each key.
As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next page.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you complete the following
programming, the screen shown below will
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go
back to the program menu screen.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC
09 SI1%RATE
↑↓
0%
0%
10 SI2%RATE
11 CUR RATE1
12 CUR RATE2
13 CUR RATE3
14 CUR RATE4
15 CUR RATE5
16 REG NO.
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
|Preset Rate of SI 1|
[SI1/TL] (or [SI/TL])
(0.001 to 99.999 (%);
use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)
|Preset Rate of SI 2|
[SI2/TL]
ex.) To set 7% as SI 1 preset % rate:
Mode Lock: SET
7 [ST1/TL]
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Journal Print
P00
SI1 TL
SI1%RATE
7%
0140 11:04TM
NOTES:
1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI % rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the
sale total is determined by a program option.
2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. (Then the rate is regarded as 100% if the option
“Non-affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale Total”, some rate other than “0” should
be programmed.)
Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications
The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main
Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective itemizer) “net” status,
the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in registering the items, while the
Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the sale finalization, the operator may
read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key.
A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the
calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a program option. Whether the amount
resulted by depressing the [SI/TL] key will print or non-print is another program option.
The applications of this function may vary from store to store. Some stores may use it for counting the service
stamps to be issued to the customers according to the sale amount of service-stampable items. In this case, the
option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may be set to
issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer is displayed
(and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted value (the
number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total.
Example 1) With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”:
Key Operation in REG Mode
Receipt/Journal Print
1 [PLU] (SI-net)
2 [PLU] (non-SI)
3 [PLU] (SI-net)
[SI/TL] (1% is preset)
[AT/TL]
1
1
1
PLU000001
PLU000002
PLU000003
1.00TS
1.50T
2.00TS
0.03
S: SI-net Status
SI1 TL
SUBTL
Number of stamps to
be issued.
4.50
PLU 1 and PLU 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1% of total
amount of PLU 1 “1.00” + PLU 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to be issued to the
customer in this case. The sale total “4.50,” is not affected by the SI calculation.
Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount sales
period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain PLUs which are
subject to the special discount.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
Example 2) With option “SI Special Discount”:
Key Operation in REG Mode
Receipt/Journal Print
1 [PLU] (SI-net)
2 [PLU] (non-SI)
3 [PLU] (SI-net)
[SI/TL] (10% is preset)
[AT/TL]
1
1
1
PLU000001
PLU000002
PLU000003
1.00TS
1.50T
2.00TS
-0.30
4.20
Discount Amount
resulted by SI %
SI1 TL
SUBTL
On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of PLU 1 + PLU 3 items) is
displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20)
■ Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting
In this program, the exchange rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR 1] to [CUR 5] keys)
will be set. By setting an exchange rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in
the foreign currency value will be possible for sale finalization.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you complete the following
programming, the screen shown below will
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go
back to the program menu screen.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC
09 SI1%RATE
↑↓
0%
0%
10 SI2%RATE
11 CUR RATE1
12 CUR RATE2
13 CUR RATE3
14 CUR RATE4
15 CUR RATE5
16 REG NO.
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1|
0.000001 to 9999.999999
[CUR 1]
(Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.)
|Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5|
[CUR 5]
As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below.
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation
1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the foreign
currencies. (In case of calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same zero-
suppress form, such as from American $ to French Franc, it will be no problem even if it is calculated in the
main currency of $ and Franc. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency such as $ or Franc
to Japanese yen or Italian Lira, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise a wrong rate will result.)
2. Calculation of foreign currency exchange rate is formulated as follows.
1 Foreign Currency = Domestic Currency/Rate
ex.) To obtain an exchange rate converted from the domestic currency of the Japanese ¥ into the foreign
currency American $.
When $1.00 is equal to ¥140, 1 cent = ¥140/100 cent, results in ¥1.4.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
5.4 How to Access a Program Item
ex.) To set the rate on the preceding page for the [CUR 1] key.
Mode Lock: SET
1 [ . ] 4 [CUR 1]
Journal Print
P00
CUR1
CUR RATE1
0160 11:35TM
1.4
*
Enter 0 to reset an exchange rate once set. You cannot use a foreign currency key of which the rate is 0.
■ Store/Register No. Setting
A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed on
every receipt and every transaction on journal.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET
When you complete the following
programming, the screen shown below will
appear. Depress the [ESC] key to go
back to the program menu screen.
SET
02-06-1999 12:34
*
*
PROGRAMMING MISC
09 SI1%RATE
↑↓
0%
0%
10 SI2%RATE
11 CUR RATE1
12 CUR RATE2
13 CUR RATE3
14 CUR RATE4
15 CUR RATE5
16 REG NO.
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
#0
Please input data.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
|Store/Register No.|
[#]
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999
ex.) To set the following:
Journal Print
Register No. of this terminal: 3001
OPERATION: Mode Lock: SET
3001 [#]
P00
REG No.
0161 11:42TM
#3001
NOTE: The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in the above
operation, “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
6.1 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
You can verify each data programmed in the preceding chapter. Two mode lock positions are available to verify
the data; SET and X. Also two ways are available to access a programmed data you want to verify; through the
operator display and through the keyboard.
6.1
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Operator Display
When you turn the mode selector key to the SET or X position, the initial screen shown below will appear.
SET Mode
X Mode
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
1
2
X
GTX
3 PROGRAM READ
4 E-JOURNAL
5 OTHERS
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
0.00
fl
TOTAL
COMB3
0.00
fl
Pg up
Pg dw
›
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
A way to access an item you want to verify is the same as that described in the section 4.1.1 How to Access a
Report Item through the Operator Display (on page 4-1 in the manager’s guide) or 5.4.1 How to Access a
Program Item through the Operator Display (on page 5-5 in the manager’s guide).
However, when you select “104 PLU”, the register will ask you which to choose “NORMAL” or “SIMPLE” as
follows.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 12:34
PROGRAM READ PLU
1 NORMAL
*
*
2 SIMPLE
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
›
fl
•
•
Normal Verification.............. You can verify all the programmed data of a PLU table.
Simple Verification .............. You can verify the following data of a PLU table.
(PLU code, PLU name, tax status, link department, 1st preset price)
NOTES:
1. You can verify the following data in the address “100 MISC”.
(Preset rates for the [%], [SI/TL], [CUR] keys, tax table)
2. Addresses to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA
6.2 How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard
6.2
How to verify a Programmed Data through the Keyboard
You can directly access an item you want to verify through a key operation on the keyboard while the mode lock
position is in “SET” or “X”.
■ To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1,” then each Submode No.,
and finally depress the [AT/TL] key.
For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (Store Name/Message, Commercial
Message, Footer Logo Message Programming), operate:
1 0 1
[AT/TL]
Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.)
Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data.
NOTE: Key operations to verify time, date, PLU stock are not provided.
■ To verify the data of the address “100 MISC”:
1 0 0
[AT/TL]
■ To designate a zone for the PLU table verification:
1 0 4
[ST]
Zone-start [X] Zone-end
PLU Code PLU Code |
[PLU]
■ To verify a PLU table data by “Simple” format:
1 0 4 [PLU]
NOTE: To verify the PLU preset-code keys programmed on ECR Keyboard phase Nos. 2 to 5:
127 [ST] 2 to 5 [AT/TL]
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11109
MA-1650-3 SERIES
3. M/S LEVEL
OPERATOR’S GUIDE
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................1-1
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE .............2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Making the most of the functions of the previously described FS-2600 standalone, the FS-2600 can be developed
into a master-satellite system.
By connecting a PC, the system can also be expanded to a transaction data capture system.
Operational functions on each terminal ECR basically stay the same as on a standalone ECR, except those
deleted, changed, or added for this M/S system use which are described later.
PC
RS-232C
Master
Terminal
Backup Master
Terminal
*Printer
Receipt Printer
Journal Printer
RKP (Remote Kitchen Printer)
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
RS-485
Satellite
Terminal
Satellite
Terminal
Satellite
Terminal
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Max. 6 terminals
Max. 16 terminals
A system has the following features.
RKP Connection
A system has none of the features shown left.
Master Terminal: 1 unit
Floating Cashier
Order Entry controlled by Order Table No.
Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit
Satellite Terminals: 14 units
Master Terminal: 1 unit
Backup Master Terminal: 1 unit
Satellite Terminals: 4 units
or
Master Terminal: 1 unit
Satellite Terminals: 5 units
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING
PROCEDURE
The following is the key that can be installed on the Master Terminal and Back up Master of an in-line system, in
addition to the standalone specifications, and the registering procedure using the key.
RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ([RTR])
RTR
■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs
(DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed.
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/Anytime outside a sale
Depress [RTR].
NOTES:
1. While a PC job is under way ( a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the PC), the RTR
Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while the RTR Declaration is on, no PC jobs are possible.
2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in the REG, MGR or - mode are
possible.
3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed.
4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following jobs are operable.
•
•
•
•
Programming Operations
DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals)
Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings
Manual Copying of Backup Data
5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention.
6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data, the RTR
Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under way.
7. If the option “Compulsion of Data Sending to PC” is selected, the RTR Declaration is not possible
until the reset data (the consolidation data) transmission to the PC is completed.
■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal while the RTR Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration
ON status is canceled.
When the [RTR] key is depressed to declare “RTR ON”, the following indicator will appear on the LCD
operator display.
REG
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
RTR S1
RTR Declaration
Indicator
Please input cashier code
TOTAL
0.00
DISP5
DISP1
DISP2
DISP3
DISP4
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE
2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION CANCEL
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z or MGR/RTR Declaration is ON
Depress [RTR].
NOTE: If the RTR declaration cancel is performed while a backup error flag is ON, a copy process of a backup
data will be automatically performed regardless of a program option. (Automatic Copy or Manual Copy
for Backup Data).
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. M/S LEVEL
MANAGER’S GUIDE
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
FS-2600-1 SERIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE....................................................1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Terminal Open Check ......................................................................................................1-1
Terminal Designation .......................................................................................................1-2
Terminal Condition Check ...............................................................................................1-3
Printer Condition Check ...................................................................................................1-4
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS ........................................................................2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
Terminal Reports .............................................................................................................2-1
In-line Reports .................................................................................................................2-1
Operations after In-line report Taking ..............................................................................2-8
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level ....................................3-1
Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals ....................................................3-2
Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications .................................3-5
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS .....................................................4-1
4.1
4.2
DLL Job List .....................................................................................................................4-1
Print Format of DLL Operations .......................................................................................4-2
5. PLU MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................5-1
5.1
5.2
PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63) .......................................5-1
PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73) ....................................................................5-3
6. INQUIRY ...........................................................................................................6-1
7. BACKUP FUNCTION .......................................................................................7-1
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON ..........................................................................8-1
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION .......................................9-1
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR...............................................................................10-1
10.1 Cause of Error ...............................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Error Display ..................................................................................................................10-1
10.3 Error Canceling Process ................................................................................................10-2
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE........................... 11-1
11.1 Suspending ....................................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Retry ..............................................................................................................................11-1
11.3 Incomplete Ending .........................................................................................................11-1
11.4 Cancel............................................................................................................................11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE
1.1 Terminal Open Check
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE
Before entering in-line service operations (In-line Report takings, DLLs, etc.), the following operations are
available if necessary.
1.1
Terminal Open Check
This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the Terminal Connection Table (Submode 69), and
prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not responding).
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)
Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON
Through the Operator Display
Select “5 OTHERS”.
Select “80 T/M OPEN CHK”.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
OTHERS
*
*
*
*
RTR
RTR
1
2
X
GTX
80 T/M OPEN CHK
81 T/M CHK
3 PROGRAM READ
4 E-JOURNAL
5 OTHERS
82 PRT CHECK
90 CONSOLI READ
98 FILE VER CHK
99 INLINE LOG
→
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
COMB3
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
80 [AT/TL]
Master Terminal Receipt Print
When the check result is normal:
Prints the Report Name only.
When any error status is found:
Prints the Register Nos. of the terminals
not connected properly, as well as the Report Name.
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
************************************************************
****************************************
************************************************************
****************************************
X80
#3002
#3003
************************************************************
****************************************
X80
************************************************************
****************************************
NOT_CONNECT
NOT_CONNECT
0176 07:11TM
0178 07:14TM
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE
1.2 Terminal Designation
1.2
Terminal Designation
This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is skipped, no specific
terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed to all the terminals.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale (operable on the Master Terminal)
Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to follow) and RTR
Declaration ON
Through the Operator Display (NOTE 2 below)
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.
Select “T/M DESIGN”.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
X
*
RTR
RTR
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
68 PC COMM
69 CONNECT REG
T/M DESIGN
70 INLINE COMM
71 PRINTER
73 PRICE CHG
77 INLINE ID
78 LOGO
→
TAX TABLE
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
[#]
|Register No.| [#]
[AT/TL]
Enter the Register No. of a
Terminal which is subject to the in-
line service operations to follow.
Repeat for other terminals which are
subject to the in-line service operation.
NOTES:
1. The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled by changing
the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by turning OFF and ON the
power of the terminal. The designation is automatically canceled on completion of the operation
to follow or when a new designation is operated.
2. You should perform the terminal designation through the operator display only when an in-line
service operation to follow is that regarding the SET mode. As described in NOTE 1, the mode
lock change after designating a terminal results in the cancellation of the terminal designation you
declared.
ex.) To designate the following terminal.
Terminal ID No. 4:
Register No. 3003
Mode Lock: SET, X or Z (depending on an inline-service operation to follow)/RTR Declaration ON
[#] 3003 [#] [AT/TL]
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE
1.3 Terminal Condition Check
Journal Print
P00
#04
T/M DESIGN
#3003
0189 09:26TM
1.3
Terminal Condition Check
This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status responded from the
terminals.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)
Mode Lock: X and RTR Declaration ON
Through the Operator Display
Select “5 OTHERS”.
Select “81 T/M CHK”.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
OTHERS
*
*
*
*
RTR
RTR
1
2
X
GTX
80 T/M OPEN CHK
81 T/M CHK
3 PROGRAM READ
4 E-JOURNAL
5 OTHERS
82 PRT CHECK
90 CONSOLI READ
98 FILE VER CHK
99 INLINE LOG
→
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
COMB3
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
81 [AT/TL]
Master Terminal Receipt Print
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
************************************************************
****************************************
X81
T/M_CHECK
#3001
#3002
#3003
OK
NO RESPONSE
NO RESPONSE
Status Symbol
OK: The terminal condition is normal.
NO RESPONSE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)
************************************************************
****************************************
0191 09:42TM
Blank: Other statuses
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
1. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE
1.4 Printer Condition Check
1.4
Printer Condition Check
This operation checks the conditions of the printers connected to each terminal.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale (operable on each terminal)
Mode Lock: X
Through the Operator Display
Select “5 OTHERS”.
Select “82 PRT CHECK”.
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
X/GTX 02-06-1999 03:04
OTHERS
80 T/M OPEN CHK
*
*
*
*
RTR
1
2
X
GTX
81 T/M CHK
3 PROGRAM READ
4 E-JOURNAL
5 OTHERS
82 PRT CHECK
90 CONSOLI READ
98 FILE VER CHK
99 INLINE LOG
→
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
COMB3
COMB1
COMB2
EJ
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
82 [AT/TL]
Receipt Print
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
X82
1
R
J
RKP1
X_PRT_CHECK
OK
OK
OK
OK: The printer condition is normal.
?: Transmission Error
OFF LINE: No response (power-OFF, etc.)
0192 10:06TM
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.1 Terminal Reports
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.1
Terminal Reports
Since most reports are taken as in-line reports on the Master Terminal, some of the reports which are available
on the individual standalone ECR basis cannot be taken on Master or Satellite ECRs of the in-line system. The
following are the reports which are listed in the MANAGER’S GUIDE for the standalone level but cannot be taken
on any ECRs of the in-line system. Other reports not listed below can be taken even in the in-line system. (Before
taking those reports, however, please read the next section 2.2: In-line Reports.)
TERMINAL REPORTS that cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system
DAILY REPORTS
GT REPORTS
REPORT NAME
REPORT NAME
CASHIER READ AND RESET REPORTS
(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET REPORTS
(when adopting the Floating Cashier Feature)
•
•
•
•
Individual Cashier Read
Individual Cashier Reset
All Cashier Read
•
•
•
•
Individual Cashier GT Read
Individual Cashier GT Reset
All Cashier GT Read
All Cashier Reset
All Cashier GT Reset
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITH
SALES READ AND RESET REPORTS
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT GT READ
AND RESET REPORTS
•
•
•
•
Individual Cashier Read
Individual Cashier Reset
All Cashier Read
All Cashier Reset
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table) WITHOUT
SALES READ REPORTS
•
•
Individual Cashier
All Cashier
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT READ AND
RESET REPORTS (Daily and Weekly)
2.2
In-line Reports
2.2.1
In-line Report Command Executions
Before taking in-line reports, please note the following:
1) In-line Reset Reports (as well as In-line Read Reports) can be taken on the Master Terminal as long as the
Satellite Terminals are in the idle status (“Signed OFF”condition in case of the cashier code entry type). To
check status of all the terminals connected to the in-line loop, Terminal Condition Check can be operated
(refer to Chapter 1).
2) When In-line Reports are taken, the power of each Satellite terminal must be turned ON but the Mode Lock
can be in any position.
The operation flow for taking In-line Reports is shown on the next page, and the table of In-line Reports is on the
following pages.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 In-line Reports
The key operation for each In-line Report is the same as the corresponding terminal report available on the
standalone ECR. However, the key operation can be executed only on the Master Terminal while the [RTR] key
is turned on.
Conditions required on terminals for In-line Report takings:
Read/Reset Reports (Daily or GT)
Master Terminal:
Any time outside a sale
Satellite Terminals: Signed-OFF condition (Code Entry Method)
Lock Positions Required:
Master Terminal:
Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON
Mode Lock: Z/RTR Declaration: ON
Satellite Terminals: Any positions
WARNING!
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.
OPERATION FLOW OF IN-LINE READ OR RESET REPORTS
To be operated on the
Master Terminal only
Designating
All Terminals
Designating Some Terminals
[#]
|Store/Register No.|
of the terminal to be
designated (max. 6 digits)
Repeat for
all the
terminals to
be designated.
Refer to
Chapter 1
[#]
[AT/TL]
Report Taking Operation for Each Report (see the following pages).
Each Terminal s Report Data Collection Process
Refer to the
following pages.
When the option Individual Terminal
Data Report Issue is selected.
In other cases
(applicable to Financial Reports only).
Each Terminal s
Data Print (from
Master Terminal)
Incomplete Ending:
Also refer to Retry,
Suspending, and
Cancel operations.
Uncollected
Terminals
Refer to
Chapter 11.
Store/Register
No. Print
Normal Ending
Consolidated
Data Report
End
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 In-line Reports
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS
RTR Declaration: ON
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
COMBINATION REPORTS
•
Combination 1 Read:
Daily
GT
X
X
[AT/TL]
200 [AT/TL]
•
•
•
•
•
Combination 2 Read:
Combination 3 Read:
Combination 1 Reset:
Combination 2 Reset:
Combination 3 Reset:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
1 [AT/TL]
201 [AT/TL]
2 [AT/TL]
202 [AT/TL]
[AT/TL]
200 [AT/TL]
1 [AT/TL]
201 [AT/TL]
2 [AT/TL]
Daily
GT
202 [AT/TL]
FINANCIAL REPORTS
•
Financial Read:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
Z
Z
3 [AT/TL]
203 [AT/TL]
3 [AT/TL]
•
Financial Reset:
203 [AT/TL]
CASHIER REPORTS
(for the Floating Cashier feature)
Code Entry Method:
•
Individual Cashier Read: Daily
X
X
Z
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.
GT
Code Entry Method:
•
Individual Cashier Reset: Daily
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
GT
Z
X
X
Z
Z
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above pattern.
•
•
All store All Cashier Read: Daily
4 [ST]
204 [ST]
4 [ST]
GT
All store All Cashier Reset: Daily
GT
204 [ST]
CASHIER REPORTS
(for the Non-Floating Cashier feature only)
•
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Read:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
Z
Z
4 [ST]
204 [ST]
4 [ST]
•
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Reset:
204 [ST]
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES REPORTS
•
Credit Card Company Sales Read: Daily
X
X
Z
Z
6 [AT/TL]
206 [AT/TL]
6 [AT/TL]
GT
Credit Card Company Sales Reset : Daily
GT
•
206 [AT/TL]
DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS (Read only)
•
Department Group Read: Daily
GT
X
X
8 [AT/TL]
208 [AT/TL]
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ
(Daily only)
X
9 [AT/TL]
(to be continued on next page)
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 In-line Reports
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)
RTR Declaration: ON
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
HOURLY RANGE REPORTS
•
•
Hourly Read (Daily only)
Hourly Reset (Daily only)
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]
10 [AT/TL]
DEPARTMENT REPORTS
•
All Department Read:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
Z
Z
11 [AT/TL]
211 [AT/TL]
11 [AT/TL]
211 [AT/TL]
•
All Department Reset:
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-
DRAWER READ (Daily only)
X
12 [AT/TL]
PLU REPORTS
•
•
•
All PLU Read:
All PLU Reset:
Zone PLU Read:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
Z
Z
X
13 [AT/TL]
213 [AT/TL]
13 [AT/TL]
213 [AT/TL]
Daily
13 [#] → |Zone-start PLU Code|
[X] → |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.
13 [#] → |Zone-start PLU Code|
[X] → |Zone-end PLU Code| [AT/TL]
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.
(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)
GT
Daily
X
Z
•
•
Zone PLU Reset:
GT
Daily
Z
X
Individual PLU Read:
13 [#] → |PLU Code| [PLU] → ([ST]) [AT/TL]
Repeat for required PLUs.
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.
(Process Reports; NOTE on page 2-5)
13 [#] → 0 [AT/TL]
GT
X
X
X
X
•
Inactive PLU Read:
Daily
GT
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above pattern.
PLU STOCK READ REPORTS (Daily only)
•
Individual PLU Stock
X
(Process Reports; NOTE page 2-5)
14 [#] → |PLU Code| [PLU] → [AT/TL]
Repeatable
•
Zone PLU Stock
All PLU Stock
X
X
14 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
| PLU Code |
14 [AT/TL]
PLU Code |
•
CUSTOMER FILE REPORTS (Daily only)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Individual File Read
Zone File Read
Zone File Reset
All File Read
All File Reset
Inactive File Read
X
X
Z
X
Z
X
15 [#] |File Code| [X] [AT/TL]
15 [#] Zone-start [X] Zone-end [AT/TL]
| File Code |
File Code |
15 [AT/TL]
15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]
PLU GROUP REPORTS
•
PLU Group Read:
Daily
GT
Daily
GT
X
X
Z
Z
24 [AT/TL]
224 [AT/TL]
24 [AT/TL]
224 [AT/TL]
•
PLU Group Reset:
(to be continued on next page)
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 In-line Reports
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)
RTR Declaration: ON
Report Name
Mode
Lock
Key Operation
DAY PART REPORTS (Daily only)
•
•
Day Part Read
Day Part Reset
X
Z
25 [AT/TL]
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)
WITH SALES REPORTS (Daily only)
•
•
Individual Cashier Read
Individual Cashier Reset
X
Z
Code Entry Method:
30 [#] → |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
Cashier Key Method:
Depress the required Cashier Key, 30 [AT/TL]
•
•
All Store All Cashier Read
All Store All Cashier Reset
X
Z
30 [ST]
CHECK TRACK (Guest Order Table)
WITHOUT SALES READ REPORTS (Daily only)
•
Individual Cashier Read
X
Code Entry Method:
31 [#] → |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]
(2-digit manager-assign code)
Cashier Key Method:
Depress et the required Cashier Key, 31 [AT/TL]
31 [ST]
•
All Store All Cashier Read
X
X
COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)
•
Individual Combo Read
43 [#] → |Combo Code| [#] ([ST]) → [AT/TL]
Repeatable
•
•
•
•
All Combo Read
All Combo Reset
All Combo Read (detail)
All Combo Reset (detail)
X
Z
X
Z
43 [ST]
43 [AT/TL]
HOURLY COMBO SALE REPORTS (Daily only)
•
•
Hourly Combo Sale Read
Hourly Combo Sale Reset
X
Z
44 [AT/TL]
EMPLOYEE CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT REPORTS
•
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Read: Daily
Weekly
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
47 [AT/TL]
247 [AT/TL]
248 [AT/TL]
47 [AT/TL]
247 [AT/TL]
248 [AT/TL]
GT
•
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Reset: Daily
Weekly
GT
NOTE: When the “Process Report” is marked, the report can only be taken after taking another report which
consolidates the corresponding data to be based on. For further details, see the following table and
descriptions.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 In-line Reports
PROCESS REPORTS AND BASE REPORT DATA
The following table shows which process reports are available after which report data collections.
Reports Collection Required before Process
Report takings
(CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: NOTE 1)
Process Reports available
Individual PLU Read Daily
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)
Inactive PLU Read Daily
All PLU Read Daily
Zone PLU Read Daily
All PLU Reset Daily
Zone PLU Reset Daily
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)
Individual PLU Read GT
Inactive PLU Read GT
All PLU Read GT
Zone PLU Read GT
All PLU Reset GT
Zone PLU Reset GT
Either of the following PLU stock reports (NOTE 2)
All PLU Stock Read
Individual PLU Stock Read
Zone PLU Stock Read
NOTES:
1. CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: When an in-line read or reset report is taken on the
Master Terminal, the consolidated data is automatically stored in the Consolidation Memory of
the Master Terminal. The consolidated data stored there is not only used as the data for a
Process Report but also sent to the PC by a command from the PC when a PC is connected.
However, Consolidation memory capturing of a PLU report and other reports cannot be
performed at the same time. Only one job for the same Report No. can be captured in the
Consolidated Memory (A Read and a Reset of the same report is regarded as one job), and it
always holds the latest consolidated data.
2. The process reports will be output based on the report data previously collected. For example,
when an “Inactive PLU Read” report is taken after a “Zone PLU Read”, only the inactive PLUs in
the designated zone will be printed on the Inactive Read Report.
2.2.2
In-line Report Print Format
IN-LINE REPORT TYPE
An in-line report can be classified into the following five types.
1. Collects data from each terminal to print a consolidation result:
Credit Card Company Sales, Department Group, Hourly Range, All Department, All/Zone PLU, All/Zone
PLU Stock, PLU Group, Day Part, Combo Sales, Hourly Combo Sales Reports
2. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal:
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Report (Non-floating Cashier)
3. Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal and then print the consolidation result:
Financial, Media Sales & In-drawer and All Media Sales Total & Cash-in-drawer Reports
4. Creates a process data using consolidated data and prints a report:
Indiv. PLU, Inactive PLU and Indiv. PLU Stock Reports
5. Prints data in the center file possessed by the master terminal:
Indiv./All Cashier (Floating Cashier), Guest File, Check Track with/without Sales, Employee Clock-in/
Clock-out Reports
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.2 IN-LINE REPORTS
The print format of each report is basically the same as the format of the corresponding standalone terminal
report except that some indications are additionally printed as in-line operation job IDs.
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
RTR-Symbol
Report Name
****************************************
(When designating a zone, a zone range is printed.)
For print items, refer to the similar report described in the Stand-
alone section.
#111101
#222202
0001Z
0001Z
Register No., Reset Count
(on Reset Report only)
#999909
0001Z
RTR Symbol
****************************************
Unfinished register No. and status
NO RESPONSE: No response
BUSY: The terminal is busy.
Blank: Other statuses
#555505 XXXXXXXXXXXX
#666606 XXXXXXXXXXXX
0176 07:11TM
Consecutive No., Current Time
Journal Indications on Individual Terminals (when report data is collected)
Read Report Collection Indication
X03
FINANCIAL
22:30TM
*
*
Read Operation Descriptor
Time of Data Collection
Reset Report Collection Indication
Time of Data Collection
Time of Clear Command Reception
Z03
= Z03
FINANCIAL
FINANCIAL
22:30TM
22:30TM =
*
*
Reset Operation Descriptor
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
2. READ AND RESET REPORTS
2.3 Operations after In-line report Taking
2.3
Operations after In-line report Taking
The following operations are available after taking in-line reports.
2.3.1
Consolidated report Data Read (Reprint)
This operation issues the report data which is remaining in the Consolidation Memory of the Master Terminal.
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration: ON
90 [AT/TL]
When no consolidated data is remaining in the memory, this read operation is not possible.
2.3.2
Enforced Clear of Hold Condition (on Individual Terminals)
This can be operated when the HOLD condition on a terminal can by no means be cleared because the terminal
cannot receive a Clear Command from the Master Terminal for some reason (the Master Terminal becomes
down, etc. before completion of the reset report data collection).
OPERATION ON ANY TERMINAL IN HOLD CONDITION: Mode Lock: Z
9999 [AT/TL]
On operating this, the HOLD condition is cleared, and allows any key-in operations. However, this operation
is regarded as an emergency measure to cope with such trouble as the Master Terminal becomes down, etc.
and thus no other solutions can be chosen, because the sales data memory of those reports can no longer be
collected by the Master Terminal.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
3.1 Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
The system should be programmed fully by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative at the time of delivery
according to the user’s requirements so that daily operations can immediately start. However, some data must be
added or changed daily or in a longer period. Since the volume of programming contents for the system is too
large, this chapter and the following two chapters are provided as guide lines of the user’s daily programming and
maintenance operations. If there are any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed
or added, please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that some programming
operations introduced in the Standalone Level are modified or not available on in-line terminals.
WARNING!
Never try to access a program item other than those in the following list. If you access it and
mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.
3.1
Programming Operations Common with Standalone ECR Level
The following is the table of programming operations which are introduced in the Manager’s Guide for the
Standalone Level and can be operated on in-line terminals as well, with the Submode No. and operation
sequence unchanged. However, on in-line terminals, these are usually operated on the Master Terminal only and
down-line-loaded (DLLed) to all the Satellite Terminals. Therefore, if any program data is changed, a DLL is
further necessary to load the new data (after the change) to all the Satellite Terminals (to be described in the next
chapter).
PROGRAMMING JOB LIST
Master: Programming is possible on the master terminal while the RTR declaration is ON.
Satellite: Programming is possible on the master terminal (while the RTR declaration is OFF), the backup master
terminal and the satellite terminals.
O: Available
Submode
Programming Job
Terminal
No.
1
Master Satellite
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message
Programming
O
O
2
3
Cashier Programming
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Department Table Programming
PLU Table Programming
4
5
Time Setting or Adjustment
O
O
6
Date Setting or Adjustment
7
Hourly Range Setting
8
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting
Minor Group Name Programming
Major Group Name Programming
Customer File Table Setting
O
12
13
14
15
19
24
26
27
Combination Report Table Programming
PLU Stock Loading or Changing
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting
O
O
O
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals
Submode
No.
Programming Job
PLU Group Name Programming
Terminal
Master Satellite
29
30
O
O
RKP Message Programming
Display Message Programming
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key
Set Menu Table Programming
Combo Sale Table Programming
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming
Day Part Setting
31
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
35
42
43
45
46
50
Employee Table Setting
51
Job Code/Working Hour Setting
Tender Up Table Setting
52
53
Display Menu Table Setting
60
PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing
Printer Setting
71
O
O
O
No
Sub-
mode
% + and % - Preset Rate Setting
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting
Store/Register No. Setting
O
3.2
Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals
3.2.1
Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69)
This submode is required for in-line services. Enter the In-line ID No. and the Register No. of each terminal
(including the Master Terminal) connected to the in-line cable.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON.
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode
Keyboard Sheet.)
Through the Operator Display
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.
Select “69 CONNECT REG”.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
RTR
PROGRAMMING
68 PC COMM
RTR
T/M DESIGN
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
69 CONNECT REG
70 INLINE COMM
71 PRINTER
73 PRICE CHG
77 INLINE ID
78 LOGO
→
TAX TABLE
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals
Through the Keyboard
69 [X]
|In-line ID No.| [ST]
|Register No.| [#]
[AT/TL]
0 to 999999
(NOTE 2 below)
1 to 16
(NOTES 1 & 2 below)
*
* For sequentially programming
In-line ID Nos., the In-line ID
specification can be skipped.
Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master Terminal
itself.
ex.) To set the following.
Master Terminal
ID No. 1
ID No. 3
Register No. 3001
Register No. 3002
Satellite Terminal
Mode Lock: SET/RTR Declaration is ON.
69 [X]
1 [ST] 3001 [#]
3 [ST] 3002 [#]
[AT/TL]
Journal Print
P69
#01
#03
CONNECT REG
#
#
3001
3002
0196 01:52TM
NOTES:
1. In-line ID No.: Master Terminal ............................................1 (fixed)
Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ........2 (fixed)
Satellite Terminals.........................................3 to 16 (max. 14 terminals)
However, a number of the connectable terminals differs depending on your system configuration.
Refer to the chapter 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION of the Operator’s Guide.
2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the same as those
programmed for the terminal in In-line Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) and Store/Register No.
Setting (no submode) in Chapter 5 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-alone level.
3. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in place of the In-
line ID No. in the above operation pattern.
4. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate:
69 [X] → 0 [AT/TL]
5. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is performed, the files occupied by the
deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) are canceled. Therefore, a deleting
operation should be performed only when the system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be
detached from the system.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
3.2 Programming Operations Added for In-line Terminals
3.2.2
Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77)
This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals) . It must be
operated separately on each terminal since the Terminal ID should vary from terminal to terminal. The data set in
this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service operations.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON (for the Master Terminal)
Mode Lock: SET (for other terminals)
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode
Keyboard Sheet.)
Through the Operator Display
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.
Select “77 INLINE ID”.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
RTR
PROGRAMMING
68 PC COMM
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
T/M DESIGN
69 CONNECT REG
70 INLINE COMM
71 PRINTER
73 PRICE CHG
77 INLINE ID
78 LOGO
→
TAX TABLE
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
77 [X]
|Terminal ID No.|
[AT/TL]
1: Master
2: Backup Master
3 to 16: Satellites
ex.) To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to a satellite terminal of the in-line system:
Mode Lock: SET
77 [X] 4 [AT/TL]
Journal Print
12-25-1999 SAT
INLINE ID
#3001
P77
INLINE ID
04
0196 01:52TM
NOTE: Be certain not to set the same terminal ID No. to terminals on the in-line system.
If terminals with the same ID No. exist on the in-line system, malfunction may occur.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS
3.3 Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications
3.3
Verification of Programmed Data Related to In-line Specifications
The programmed data related to in-line specifications can be read for verification purposes.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Anytime outside a sale (Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method)
Mode Lock: X or SET
(RTR Declaration is unnecessary on the Master Terminal.)
•
•
Terminal Connection Table.................169 [AT/TL]
Terminal ID Setting .............................177 [AT/TL]
NOTES:
1. Verifications listed in the Manager’s Guide of the standalone level are also available on all the
terminals of the in-line system.
2. The verification of Terminal Connection Table can be executed on the Satellite Terminals after
the DLL operation.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS
4.1 DLL Job List
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS
In an in-line system (Master-Satellite system), most programming data are set on the Master Terminal and down-
line-loaded (DLL) to the Satellite Terminals. The DLL operations introduced in this chapter are pure DLLs, i.e.
merely loading the data programmed in the Master Terminal to Satellite Terminals. DLLs automatically performed
with programmed data changes are introduced in the next chapter. If any other DLLs not introduced in this and
next chapters are required, ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that Terminal Designation
(see Chapter 1) can be operated prior to a specific DLL operation, to designate Satellite Terminals that receive
the DLL.
WARNING!
Never try to perform a DLL operation other than those in the following list. If you perform it and
mistakenly change important data, a malfunction may occur on your completed system.
4.1
DLL Job List
Submode
No.
DLL Job
Remarks
501
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message, Footer Logo Message
Programming
502
Cashier Programming
NOTE on the
next page
503
504
505
507
508
512
513
514
519
526
527
529
530
531
535
542
543
545
546
552
553
569
500
Department Table Programming
PLU Table Programming
Time/Date Setting
Hourly Range Setting
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys and Guests
Non-taxable Limit Amount and Gratuity Rate Setting
Minor Group Name Programming
Major Group Name Programming
Combination Report Table Programming
Tare Table and Scale Unit Weight Programming
PLU Preset-code Key and Display Key Setting
PLU Group Name Programming
RKP Message Programming
Display Message Programming
Amount Limit Setting for the [DISC] Key
Set Menu Table Programming
Combo Sale Table Programming
Guest Check Commercial Message Programming
Day Part Setting
Tender Up Table Setting
Display Menu Table Setting
Terminal Connection Table Setting
%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting
Selective Itemizer Rate Setting
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
4. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS
4.2 Print Format of DLL Operations
NOTE: DLL is possible only when the non-floating cashier feature is used.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Terminals including the Master: Any time outside a sale
(Sign OFF condition is necessary for the Code Entry Method)
Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON
Master Terminal:
Mode Lock: SET
RTR Declaration: ON
Through the Operator Display
Select “3 PROGRAM DLL”.
Select a DLL item you want to perform.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
RTR
PROGRAM DLL
590 ALL DLL
591 ALL DLL2
500 MISC
501 STORE NAME
502 CASHIER
503 DEPARTMENT
504 PLU
RTR
↓
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
507 HOURLY
508 AMOUNT LIMIT
509 FINANCIAL
510 PRINT L NAME
511 SYSTEM OP2
512 CA TAX & TIP
513 MINOR GROUP
514 MAJOR
→
505 TIME/DATE
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation and Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
Through the Keyboard
|X X X|
[AT/TL]
Submode No.
4.2
Print Format of DLL Operations
Master Terminal Receipt
Satellite Terminal Journal
P504
PLU
22:30TM
*
*
12-25-1999 SAT
#3001
****************************************
P504
****************************************
PLU
Time of receiving the
DLL
0176 07:11TM
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PLU MAINTENANCE
5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)
5. PLU MAINTENANCE
In this chapter, adding, changing, or deleting operations related to PLU Table program data are described. These
are operated on the Master Terminal only. All of these operations are loaded into Satellite Terminals at the same
time.
5.1
PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)
This submode can be operated only on the Master Terminal in an in-line system. This submode allows additions/
changes/deletions of PLUs in the PLU Table File (generated by Submode 4 in the Manager’s Guide for stand-
alone level). The data entered in this submode is immediately loaded into Satellite Terminals, item by item.
■ Programming or Changing
CONDITION
OPERATION
All the terminals:
Anytime outside a sale
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON
(Use the SET Mode Keyboard Sheet after depressing the [RTR] key on the REG Mode
Keyboard Sheet.)
Through the Operator Display
Select “63 PLU ADD/CHG” from
the program menu screen.
Select “1 PROGRAMMING”.
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
SET
02-06-1999 03:04
*
*
*
*
RTR
PROGRAMMING
35 LIMIT TABLE
RTR
↑↓
1 PROGRAMMING
2 PROGRAM READ
3 PROGRAM DLL
48 CUR ROUND1
49 CUR ROUND2
50 EMPLOYEE
51 JOB CODE
52 TENDER UP
53 MENU TABLE
60 PRICE
38 DRAWER WNG
39 REPORT NAME
42 SET MENU
43 COMBO
44 SLIP PRINT
45 INVO CM MSG
46 DAY PART
→
63 PLU ADD/CHG
Please select operation by Enter key.
Please select operation by Enter key.
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
Enter
Pg up
Pg dw
↑
↓
Pg up
Pg dw
Enter
↑
↓
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PLU MAINTENANCE
5.1 PLU Table Addition/Change/Deletion with DLL (Submode 63)
Through the Keyboard
63 [X]
|Address Nos| [#]
|PLU Code|
[PLU]
for sequential-coded item only
Submode No.
Address 1: Link Department
|Department Code| [#]
(1 to 99)
1 [ST]
Address 2: PLU Name
Character Entries [ST]
max. 16 characters
2 [ST]
Operation
procedure
surrounded
by this line
is the same
as the
operation in
Submode 4.
Address 3: 1st Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
3 [ST]
Address 4: 2nd Preset Price
Repeat for any
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
address within
the same PLU
by re-entry for
correction.
4 [ST]
Address 5: 3rd Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
5 [ST]
Address 6: 4th Preset Price
Repeat for
other
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
6 [ST]
PLUs.
Address 7: 5th Preset Price
|Price| [#]
(max. 6 digits)
7 [ST]
Address 8: PLU Status 1
|Status Code to ON| [#]
8 [ST]
Address 9: PLU Status 2
|Status Code to ON| [#]
9 [ST]
Address 10: Tax Status
|Tax Code| [#]
10 [ST]
Address 11: PLU Group
|PLU Group Code| [#]
11 [ST]
(1 to 99)
Address 12: Set Menu Table
|Set Menu Table No.| [#]
12 [ST]
(1 to 50)
Address 13: Display Menu Table
|Display Menu Table No.| [#]
13 [ST]
(max. 10 digits)
Address 14: Stock Quantity
|Stock Quantity| [#]
14 [ST]
(0 to 9999.99)
Address 15: Minimum Stock Quantity
|Minimum Stock Quantity| [#]
15 [ST]
(0 to 9999.99)
Address 16: Takeout Tax Status
|Tax Code| [#]
(max. 4 digits)
16 [ST]
Address 17: Tare Table
|Tare Table No.| [#]
17 [ST]
1 to 9
Address 18: Unit Weight
|Unit Weight Table| [#]
18 [ST]
1 to 11
[ST]
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)
Executes DLL.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
5. PLU MAINTENANCE
5.2 PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)
■ Deletion
CONDITION
The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a sale,
programming, or report taking operations.
OPERATION
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON
63 [X]
[ITEM CORR]
|PLU Code| [PLU]
[AT/TL]
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.
NOTES:
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each
satellite terminal (or the designated satellite terminals) the DLL start command to make it “HOLD”
condition. And then, the master terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is
completed, the master terminal sends each terminal the DLL end command to release it from
“HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you to perform a DLL operation even while
each terminal is not in idle status.
2. A maximum of 100 PLU tables can be added or changed in one DLL operation sequence.
5.2
PLU Price Change with DLL (Submode 73)
This DLL operation is used to change a PLU price on each price level, and send the data to each satellite terminals.
CONDITION
OPERATION
Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite
Mode Lock: SET and RTR Declaration is ON
Repeatable for other PLUs
73 [X]
|PLU Code| [PLU]
Max. 6 digits
[PLU Preset-code Key]
[MENU 1 to 5]
|Price Level| [ST]
|New Preset Price| [#]
[AT/TL]
1 to 5
Max. 6 digits
Repeatable for a price change of another price level. When you
change the price of each price level in numerical order, the price level
designation can be skipped.
NOTES:
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, the master terminal sends each satellite terminal
(orthedesignatedsatelliteterminals)theDLLstartcommandtomakeit“HOLD”condition.Andthen,themaster
terminal sends the DLL data to each terminal. After the DLL is completed, the master terminal sends each
terminal the DLL end command to release it from “HOLD” condition. However, a program option allows you
to perform a DLL operation even while each terminal is not in idle status.
2. A maximum of 100 PLU prices can be changed in one DLL operation sequence.
3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero price. When the
New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will be an open-price PLU.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
6. INQUIRY
6. INQUIRY
6. INQUIRY
In the master-satellite system, the data files regarding the following inquiries between the master terminal and
each satellite terminal are maintained in the master terminal center file. Each time an item regarding the data files
are performed on each satellite terminal, the master terminal searches and checks the corresponding file and
responds to the inquiring terminal by sending a result. Also, when an item is finalized on the satellite terminal, the
master terminal will update the data file regarding the item.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cashier Occupy and Cancel Inquiry (Floating Cashier Feature)
Check Track (Guest Order Table) Occupy and Cancel Inquiry
Customer File (Regular Customer and New Customer) Inquiry
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy and Cancel Inquiry
Cashier Change Occupy and Cancel
Receipt and Journal Print Data Transmission
RKP Print Data Transmission
Printer Status Check
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
(ONLY WHEN THE BACKUP MASTER IS CONNECTED)
(1) Function
•
•
By connecting the backup master terminal (BM) , the various files stored in the master terminal (M) can
be backed up.
The terminal assigned to ID No. 2 will function as a backup master terminal (BM) . By programming ID
No. 2 in the terminal connection table and downloading this data to each terminal, the system will
function as a system in which the backup master terminal (BM) is connected.
•
By changing terminal ID from 2 to 1, the backup master terminal (BM) will function as the master
terminal (M).
<Files to be Backed Up>
Cashier Table
(When the floating cashier system is used)
Program data
Sales data
Check Track (Guest Order) Table
Item Buffer
Sales data
Sales data
Program data
PC Transmission Information Table
Employee Table
Program data
Sales data
Job Code/Working Hour Table
Customer File Table
Program data
Program data
Sales data
NOTE: Data capture (DC) transaction files are not backed up.
•
Sales data is backed up on a real-time basis.
When sales data of the master terminal (M) is updated, sales data of the backup master terminal (BM)
is updated at the same time.
•
•
Backup data check function:
Correspondence between the center files and backup data is checked every certain period of time.
Backup data update process:
When an error occurs in backup data, the following processing methods can be selected according to
the program option setting.
(1)
Automatic data copy
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that stored
in the backup master terminal (BM) , registration jobs are automatically prohibited, the backup
data is properly exchanged.
While updating the backup data, each inquiry from the terminals may result in a “MASTER IS
BUSY” error.
(2)
Manual data copy
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that of data
stored in the backup master terminal (BM) , the master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the
timing of issuing the long receipt to warn that the data is not backed up properly.
The operator should update the backup data manually.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
(2) Procedure
1) Changing Program Data (DLL from the PC)
DLL data
Backup data
Response
BM
M
PC
Response
•
When various center files from the PC are received via DLL, the master terminal (M) backs up program
data and sales data of the backup master terminal (BM) automatically and sends the result to the PC.
2) Changing Program Data (Operated on the Master Terminal)
Programming
Operation
M
•
When various center files are being programmed on the master terminal (M) , the backup error flag of
the relevant file is turned on. (At this time, backup data is not updated.)
*
*
For details about the backup error flag, refer to 5) Backup Error Flag.
For an explanation of the backup data update process, refer to 6) Backup Data Update Process.
3) Updating Sales Data
•
After each satellite terminal sends an affect data of which sales data is subject to the data backup to the
master terminal, the same data is sent to the backup master terminal and the sales data is updated.
4) Checking Backup Data
Version request
Version data
BM
M
•
•
The master terminal (M) sends the version request command to the backup master terminal (BM) every
certain period of time and receives version information about the backup data.
The master terminal (M) checks correspondence between the version information received from the
backup master terminal (BM) and the center files (stored in the M) . If an abnormality is found, the
backup error flag is turned on.
•
When a master job is being performed on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key turned on), or a PC job is
being performed backup data is not checked.
5) Backup Error Flag
•
When there is any difference between the data stored in the master terminal (M) and the backup data
stored in the backup master terminal (BM), the master terminal (M) turns on the backup error flag of the
file in which a difference was found.
•
There are the following five cases when the backup error flag is turned on.
1
2
3
4
5
6
The master terminal (M) changes the programming of the center files.
A version error is found at the backup data check.
The backup job fails after the center file has been downloaded from the PC.
Updating of the backup data fails after the center files have been reset.
Updating of the backup data fails after the center file (containing Read counter) has been read.
The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is added to the terminal connection table.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
7. BACKUP FUNCTION
•
•
While the backup error flag is on, the following operation is performed.
The master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the timing when the long receipt is printed to warn
that a backup error has occurred.
There are two timings cases the backup error flag is turned off.
1
2
The backup data is properly backed up according to the backup data update process.
The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is deleted from the terminal connection table.
6) Backup Data Update Process
(This is a process required when the backup data stored in the backup master terminal (BM) is not
updated properly due to an error.)
Backup data
BM
M
Response
•
The method for processing the backup error is selected according to a program option setting. Even if
the automatic data copy operation is selected, data copy can also be performed manually.
1
Automatic data copy
When the backup error flag is on (or turned on) , the master terminal (M) automatically sends to
the backup master terminal (BM) the file in which the error has occurred, and updates the backup
data.
2
Manual data copy
The backup data is updated by the manual operations of the operator.
*
*
*
*
When the backup data is being updated, inquiries from terminals may result in a “MASTER IS BUSY”
error.
When a “MASTER IS BUSY” error occurs, clear the error using the [C] key. Then, update the backup
data again after the master job (backup process) is complete.
Only the files with the backup error flag turned on are sent to the backup master terminal (BM) to
update the backup data.
When the master job is being done on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key is turned on), backup data is
not checked or updated.
7) Manual Copy of Backup Data
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock Z/RTR Declaration ON
900 [AT/TL]
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON
9. DATA CAPTURE FUNCITON
8. DATA CAPTURE FUNCTION
(1) Function
To make it possible to transfer data to the PC, the details of registration jobs performed on each terminal
are pooled in the master terminal (M) as transaction data.
(2) Buffering Transaction Data
When a terminal performs the finalize operation,transaction data entered in registrations is sent to the
master terminal (M). The master terminal (M) receives the transaction data and pools it in the transaction
buffer.
The transaction data is controlled usually in two buffers. One is for buffering transaction data and the other
is for collecting data from the PC. (When one buffer becomes full, or when the collection request is issued
from the PC, the buffer in use is released for the PC, and the other buffer is used for subsequent
buffering.)
(3) Collecting Transaction Data
The transaction data stored in the master terminal is sent to the PC according to the request from the PC.
If the buffer becomes full when the master terminal receives the transaction data request command from
the PC, the transaction data of the full buffer is sent to the PC. If the buffer is not full,the transaction data in
the buffer (the buffer used for buffering) is sent to the PC.
(4) Processing when the Transaction Buffer is Full
When transaction data is received from the terminal (BM, S), the master terminal checks the vacant area of
the transaction buffer. If the received transaction data cannot be stored in the buffer, the master terminal
sends to the terminal a response indicating that the buffer is full. The terminal receiving this response,
performs journal printing indicating that the transaction data is missing.
(5) Supplementary
•
Only when the transaction data capture function is selected by program option, transaction data can be
sent/received and buffered.
•
•
There is no warning reporting the remaining capacity of the transaction buffer.
Once the transaction data collection command is issued,data in one buffer is collected.
(When data in two buffers is required,this command should be issued twice.)
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION
10. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION
The Backup Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Master Terminal for an accident that the Master
Terminal becomes down, etc. And the Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Backup Master when it
comes back from repair, etc.
To switch from the Backup Master Terminal function to the Master Terminal function:
1 Disconnect the master terminal from the line.
2 When other terminals are in registration operation, finalize and cashier sign-off, or Cashier Key to OFF
operations should be performed.
Since a transmission error occurs at this time, an inquiry job should be completed.
3 Change the backup master terminal address from 2 (BM) to 1 (M). (Therefore, the backup master terminal will
function as the master terminal.)
Refer to Terminal ID Setting (Submode 77) on Chapter 3.
4 Delete the backup master terminal from the terminal connection table on the master terminal.
(Reprogramming is required.)
Refer to Terminal Connection Table Setting (Submode 69) on Chapter 3.
5 Download the terminal connection table.
The following files are guaranteed when the recovery process is performed. If a file is used in another terminal
when the master terminal goes down, however, data stored in the terminal is not guaranteed.
•
•
Files controlled in the master terminal (cashier file, etc.)
PC transmission information
The following files and data are lost when the master terminal goes down.
•
•
•
Transaction file for data capture
Files controlled locally on the master terminal
Data in the files which are used by other terminals when the master terminal goes down.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR
10.1 Cause of Error
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR
When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the inquiry to the other
station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” is displayed on that terminal and operation is
stopped.
When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving DLL data,
the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals, etc., the message
“MASTER IS BUSY” is displayed and operation is stopped.
10.1 Cause of Error
10.1.1 “IRC CONNECT ERR”
a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut, Master
Terminal’s Power-OFF, etc.).
b) Comminication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it correctly.
10.1.2 “MASTER IS BUSY”
Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes:
a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC.
b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal.
c) Backup data updating process is under way.
10.2 Error Display
IRC CONNECT ERR
MASTER IS BUSY
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
REG
02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
P1S1
*
*
*
*
IRC CONNECT ERR 01
MASTER IS BUSY
Terminal ID of the other station
0.00
0.00
0.00
TOTAL
DISP3
0.00
DISP5
TOTAL
DISP3
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP1
DISP2
DISP4
DISP5
NOTE: Depressing the [C] key cancels the error status.
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
10. TRANSMISSION ERROR
10.3 ERROR CANCELING PROCESS
10.3 Error Canceling Process
There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents.
Type 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the status before the inquiry.
Applicable Jobs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check Track Occupy Declaration
Check Track Sale Item Entry Inquiry
Cashier Occupy Inquiry
Guest Table Inquiry
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Occupy Inquiry
Cashier Change Occupy Inquiry
Type 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and waits for
RETRY or CANCEL.
Applicable Jobs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check Track Affect
Check Track Table Clear
Check Track Occupy Cancel
Cashier Affect
Cashier Cancel Inquiry
Guest Table Affect
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Affect
Employee Clock-in/Clock-out Cancel Inquiry
Cashier Change Affect
Transaction Data Send
REG 02-06-1999 03:04 1 1CLKendi
*
*
P1S1
RETRY?
Please input AT/TL key.
TOTAL
0.00
0.00
DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 DISP5
For Retry................... [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.)
For Cancel ................ [X] → [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “ X → ST ”)
** **
NOTE: The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is only for the case that the other station is in trouble which cannot be
recovered by a Retry operation.
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EO1-11138
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE
11.1 Suspending
11. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE
The following are other operations relating to in-line service operations.
11.1 Suspending
This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any terminals remain
unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation as the next step.
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)
Depress [ITEM CORR] until the key-in tone is generated.
DESCRIPTION:
The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure.
If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master terminal’s display indicates the number of
unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not possible). Now a “RETRY” or
“INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next step. (When no key-in operations are made in
about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)
11.2 Retry
This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due to “TIME
OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation.
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)
Depress [AT/TL].
DESCRIPTION:
The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible any number
of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any terminals remain
unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING operation, a
RETRY process will automatically be executed.)
11.3 Incomplete Ending
This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with the services
to service-completed terminals only.
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)
Depress [NS].
DESCRIPTION:
If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal status of
any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or “RETRY” operations, the [NS] key can be
depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals serviced and the unserviced
terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collection sequences, reports of only the
service-completed terminals will be issued.
11.4 Cancel
This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPENDING operation.
The entire in-line service being performed is canceled. This operation is effective to in-line read report operations
but not to any in-line reset report operations.
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X)
Depress [X].
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|